You are on page 1of 241

I

ntegr
ated3-
DBr
i
dgeAnal
ysi
s,Des
ignandRat
i
ng

v
ers
ion
22
CSiBridge®
Bridge Superstructure Design
AASHTO 2014

ISO BRG120619M9 Rev. 0


Proudly developed in the United States of America December 2019
Copyright

Copyright © Computers & Structures, Inc., 1978-2019


All rights reserved.

The CSI Logo® and CSiBridge® are registered trademarks of Computers & Structures,
Inc. Watch & LearnTM is a trademark of Computers & Structures, Inc. Adobe and
Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorported. AutoCAD is a
registered trademark of Autodesk, Inc.

The computer program CSiBridge® and all associated documentation are proprietary and
copyrighted products. Worldwide rights of ownership rest with Computers & Structures,
Inc. Unlicensed use of these programs or reproduction of documentation in any form,
without prior written authorization from Computers & Structures, Inc., is explicitly
prohibited.

No part of this publication may be reproduced or distributed in any form or by any


means, or stored in a database or retrieval system, without the prior explicit written
permission of the publisher.

Further information and copies of this documentation may be obtained from:

Computers & Structures, Inc.


www.csiamerica.com

info@csiamerica.com (for general information)


support@csiamerica.com (for technical support)
DISCLAIMER

CONSIDERABLE TIME, EFFORT AND EXPENSE HAVE GONE INTO THE


DEVELOPMENT AND TESTING OF THIS SOFTWARE. HOWEVER, THE USER
ACCEPTS AND UNDERSTANDS THAT NO WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED BY THE DEVELOPERS OR THE DISTRIBUTORS ON THE ACCURACY
OR THE RELIABILITY OF THIS PRODUCT.
THIS PRODUCT IS A PRACTICAL AND POWERFUL TOOL FOR STRUCTURAL
DESIGN. HOWEVER, THE USER MUST EXPLICITLY UNDERSTAND THE BASIC
ASSUMPTIONS OF THE SOFTWARE MODELING, ANALYSIS, AND DESIGN
ALGORITHMS AND COMPENSATE FOR THE ASPECTS THAT ARE NOT
ADDRESSED.
THE INFORMATION PRODUCED BY THE SOFTWARE MUST BE CHECKED BY
A QUALIFIED AND EXPERIENCED ENGINEER. THE ENGINEER MUST
INDEPENDENTLY VERIFY THE RESULTS AND TAKE PROFESSIONAL
RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE INFORMATION THAT IS USED.
Contents

Bridge Superstructure Design


1 Introduction

1.1 Organization 1-1

1.2 Recommended Reading/Practice 1-2

2 Define Loads and Load Combinations

2.1 Load Pattern Types 2-1

2.2 Design Load Combinations 2-4

2.2.1 AASHTO LRFD Code 2-4

2.2.2 AASHTO LRFD Code with Caltrans


Amendments 2-4

2.2.3 AASHTO LRFD Code with PennDOT


Amendments 2.4

2.3 Default Load Combinations 2-9

i
CSiBridge Superstructure Design

3 Live Load Distribution

3.1 Methods for Determining Live Load Distribution 3-1

3.2 Determine Live Load Distribution Factors 3-2

3.3 Apply LLD Factors 3-3


3.3.1 User Specified 3-4
3.3.2 Calculated by CSiBridge in Accordance
with AASHTO LFRD 3-4
3.3.3 Forces Read Directly from Girders 3-4
3.3.4 Uniformly Distribution to Girders 3-4

3.4 Generate Virtual Combinations 3-5


3.4.1 Stress Check 3-5
3.4.2 Shear or Moment Check 3-6

3.5 Read Forces/Stresses Directly from Girders 3-6


3.5.1 Stress Check 3-6
3.5.2 Shear or Moment Check 3-6

3.6 LLD Factor Design Example Using Method 2 3-7

4 Define a Bridge Design Request

4.1 Name and Bridge Object 4-4

4.2 Check Type 4-4

4.3 Station Range 4-6

4.4 Design Parameters 4-6

4.5 Demand Sets 4-18

4.6 Live Load Distribution Factors 4-18

ii
Contents

5 Design Concrete Box Girder Bridges

5.1 Stress Design AASHTO LFRD 5-2


5.1.1 Capacity Parameters 5-2
5.1.2 Algorithm 5-2
5.1.3 Stress Design Example 5-2

5.2 Flexure Design AASHTO LRFD 5-5


5.2.1 Capacity Parameters 5-5
5.2.2 Variables 5-5
5.2.3 Design Process 5-6
5.2.4 Algorithm 5-7
5.2.5 Flexure Design Example 5-10

5.3 Shear Design AASHTO LRFD 5-15


5.3.1 Capacity Parameters 5-15
5.3.2 Shear Design per LRFD Section 5.8.6 Segmental
Box Girder 5-17
5.3.3 Shear Design per LRFD Section 5.8.3.4.2 MCFT
Including Torsion 5-33

5.4 Principal Stress Design, AASHTO LRFD 5-33


5.4.1 Capacity Parameters 5-33
5.4.2 Demand Parameters 5-34
5.4.3 Algorithm 5-34

6 Design Multi-Cell Concrete Box Bridges using AMA

6.1 Stress Design 6-2

6.2 Shear Design 6-3


6.2.1 Variables 6-4
6.2.2 Design Process 6-6
6.2.3 Algorithms 6-6

6.3 Flexure Design 6-10


6.3.1 Variables 6-10
6.3.2 Design Process 6-11

iii
CSiBridge Superstructure Design

6.3.3 Algorithms 6-12

7 Design Concrete Slab Bridges

7.1 Stress Design 7-2

7.2 Shear Design 7-2


7.2.1 Variables 7-4
7.2.2 Design Process 7-5
7.2.3 Algorithms 7-6

7.3 Flexure Design 7-9


7.3.1 Variables 7-9
7.3.2 Design Process 7-10
7.3.3 Algorithms 7-11

8 Design Precast Concrete Girder Bridges

8.1 Stress Design 8-1

8.2 Shear Design 8-2


8.2.1 Variables 8-4
8.2.2 Design Process 8-5
8.2.3 Algorithms 8-6
8.2.4 Shear Design Example 8-9

8.3 Flexure Design 8-16


8.3.1 Variables 8-16
8.3.2 Design Process 8-17
8.3.3 Algorithms 8-18
8.3.4 Flexure Capacity Design Example 8-22

8.4 Principal Stress Design 8-26


8.4.1 Capacity Parameters 8-26
8.4.2 Demand Parameters 8-27
8.4.3 Algorithm 8-27

9 Design Steel I-Beam Bridge with Composite Slab

iv
Contents

9.1 Section Properties 9-1


9.1.1 Yield Moments 9-1
9.1.2 Plastic Moments 9-3
9.1.3 Section Classification and Factors 9-7

9.2 Demand Sets 9-12


9.2.1 Demand Flange Stresses fbu and ff 9-13
9.2.2 Demand Flange Lateral Bending
Stress f1 9-15
9.2.3 Depth of the Web in Compression 9-15
9.2.4 Moment Gradient Modifier Cb 9-16

9.3 Strength Design Request 9-17


9.3.1 Flexure 9-17
9.3.2 Shear 9-25

9.4 Service Design Request 9-27

9.5 Fatigue Design Request 9-29


9.5.1 Web Fatigue 9-29
9.5.2 Flange Fatigue 9-30

9.6 Constructability Design Request 9-30


9.6.1 Staged (Steel I Comp Construct Stgd) 9-30
9.6.2 Non-staged (Steel I Comp Construct
Non-staged) 9-31
9.6.3 Slab Status vs Unbraced Length 9-31
9.6.4 Flexure 9-32
9.6.5 Shear 9-34

9.7 Section Optimization 9-36

9.8 PennDOT Amendments for DM-4 9-37

10 Design Steel U-Tub Bridge with Composite Slab

10.1 Section Properties 10-1


10.1.1 Yield Moments 10-1

v
CSiBridge Superstructure Design

10.1.2 Plastic Moments 10-2


10.1.3 Section Classification and Factors 10-7

10.2 Demand Sets 10-9


10.2.1 Demand Flange Stresses fbu and ff 10-10

10.2.2 Demand Flange Lateral Bending


Stress f1 10-11
10.2.3 Depth of the Web in Compression 10-12

10.3 Strength Design Request 10-13


10.3.1 Flexure 10-13
10.3.2 Shear 10-16

10.4 Service Design Request 10-19

10.5 Web Fatigue Design Request 10-20

10.6 Constructability Design Request 10-22


10.6.1 Staged (Steel-U Comp Construct Stgd) 10-22
10.6.2 Non-staged (Steel-U Comp Construct NonStgd) 10-22
10.6.3 Slab Status vs Unbraced Length 10-23
10.6.4 Flexure 10-23
10.6.5 Shear 10-27

10.7 Section Optimization 10-30

11 Run a Bridge Design Request

11.1 Description of Example Model 11-2

11.2 Design Preferences 11-3

11.3 Load Combinations 11-3

11.4 Bridge Design Request 11-5

11.5 Start Design/Check of the Bridge 11-6

vi
Contents

12 Display Bridge Design Results

12.1 Display Results as a Plot 12-1


12.1.1 Additional Display Examples 12-2

12.2 Display Data Tables 12-7

12.3 Advanced Report Writer 12-8

12.4 Verification 12-11

Bibliography

vii
Chapter 1
Introduction

As the ultimate versatile, integrated tool for modeling, analysis, and design of
bridge structures, CSiBridge can apply appropriate code-specific design pro-
cesses to concrete box girder bridge design, design when the superstructure in-
cludes Precast Concrete Box bridges with a composite slab and steel I-beam or
U-tub bridges with composite slabs. The ease with which these tasks can be ac-
complished makes CSiBridge the most productive bridge design package in the
industry.

Design using CSiBridge is based on load patterns, load cases, load combina-
tions and design requests. The design output can then be displayed graphically
and printed using a customized reporting format.

It should be noted that the design of bridge superstructure is a complex subject


and the design codes cover many aspects of this process. CSiBridge is a tool to
help the user with that process. Only the aspects of design documented in this
manual are automated by the CSiBridge design capabilities. The user must
check the results produced and address other aspects not covered by
CSiBridge.

1.1 Organization
This manual is designed to help you become productive using CSiBridge de-
sign in accordance with the available codes when modeling concrete box girder

1-1
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

bridges and precast concrete girder bridges. Chapter 2 describes code-specific


design prerequisites. Chapter 3 describes Live Load Distribution Factors.
Chapter 4 describes defining the design request, which includes the design re-
quest name, a bridge object name (i.e., the bridge model), check type (i.e., the
type of design), station range (i.e., portion of the bridge to be designed), design
parameters (i.e., overwrites for default parameters) and demand sets (i.e., load-
ing combinations). Chapter 5 identifies code-specific algorithms used by
CSiBridge in completing concrete box girder bridges. Chapter 6 provides code-
specific algorithms used by CSiBridge in completing concrete box and multi-
cell box girder bridges. Chapter 7 describes code-speicifc design parameters for
precast I and U girder. Chapter 8 explains how to design and optimize a steel I-
beam bridge with composite slab. Chapter 9 describes how to design and opti-
mize a steel U-beam bridge with composite slab. Chapter 10 describes how to
run a Design Request using an example that applies the AASHTO LRFD code,
and Chapter 11 describes design output for the example in Chapter 10, which
can be presented graphically as plots, in data tables, and in reports generated
using the Advanced Report Writer feature.

1.2 Recommended Reading/Practice


It is strongly recommended that you read this manual and review any applica-
ble “Watch & Learn” Series™ tutorials, which are found on our web site,
http://www.csiamerica.com, before attempting to design a concrete box girder
or precast concrete bridge using CSiBridge. Additional information can be
found in the on-line Help facility available from within the software’s main
menu.

1-2 Recommended Reading/Practice


Chapter 2
Define Loads and Load Combinations

This chapter describes the steps that are necessary to define the loads and load
combinations that the user intends to use in the design of the bridge superstruc-
ture. The user may define the load combinations manually or have CSiBridge
automatically generate the code generated load combinations. The appropriate
design code may be selected using the Design/Rating > Superstructure Design
> Preference command.

When the code generated load combinations are going to be used, it is important
for users to define the load pattern type in accordance with the applicable code.
The load pattern type can be defined using the Loads > Load Patterns com-
mand. The user options for defining the load pattern types are summarized in the
Tables 2-1 and 2-2 for the AASHTO LRFD code.

2.1 Load Pattern Types


Tables 2-1 and 2-2 show the permanent and transient load pattern types that can
be defined in CSiBridge. The tables also show the AASHTO abbreviation and
the load pattern descriptions. Users may choose any name to identify a load pat-
tern type.

Load Pattern Types 2-1


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Table 2-1 PERMANENT Load Pattern Types Used in the AASHTO-LRFD Code
CSiBridge AASHTO
Load Pattern Type Reference Description of Load Pattern
Creep CR Force effects due to creep
Downdrag DD Downdrag force
Dead, DC Dead load of structural components and non-
Dead Manufacture, structural attachments
Water DL
Wearing Surface DW Superimposed dead load of wearing surfaces
and utilities
Hor Eearth Pr, EH Horizontal earth pressures
Hydrostatic,
Passive Earth Pr,
Active Earth Pr
Locked In EL Misc. locked-in force effects resulting from the
construction process
Earth Surchr ES Earth surcharge loads
Ver Earth Pr EV Vertical earth pressure
Prestress, PS Hyperstatic forces from post-tensioning
Hyperstatic
Shrinkage SH Force effects due to shrinkage

Table 2-2 TRANSIENT Load Pattern Types Used in the AASHTO LRFD Design Code

CSiBridge AASHTO
Load Pattern Type Reference Description of Load Pattern
Braking BR Vehicle braking force
Centrifugal CE Vehicular centrifugal loads
Vehicle Collision CT Vehicular collision force

Vessel Collision CV Vessel collision force


Quake EQ Earthquake
Friction FR Friction effects
Ice IC Ice loads
Impact IM Vehicle Dynamic Load Allowance
Vehicle Live LL Vehicular live load
Permit Veh Live LL-P Permit Vehicular live load
Vehicle Fatigue LL-F Fatigue Vehicular live load
Vehicle Deflection LL-D Deflection Vehicular live load

2-2 Load Pattern Types


Chapter 2 - Define Loads and Load Combinations

Table 2-2 TRANSIENT Load Pattern Types Used in the AASHTO LRFD Design Code

CSiBridge AASHTO
Load Pattern Type Reference Description of Load Pattern
LL Surchr LS Live load surcharge
PedestrianLL PL Pedestrian live load
Settlement SE Force effects due settlement
Temp Grad TG Temperature gradient loads
Temperature TU Uniform temperature effects
Water Pr, WA Water load and stream pressure
Stream Flow
Bouyancy
Wind - Live Load WL Wind on live load
Wind WS Wind loads on structure

2-3
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

2.2 Design Load Combinations


2.2.1 AASHTO LRFD Code
The code generated design load combinations make use of the load pattern types
noted in Tables 2-1 and 2-2. Table 2-3 shows the load factors and combinations
that are required in accordance with the AASHTO LRFD code.

Tables 2-4 and 2-5 shows the maximum and minimum factors for the permanent
loads in accordance with the AASHTO LRFD code.

Two combinations for each permanent load pattern are required because of the
maximum and minimum factors. When the default load combinations are used,
CSiBridge automatically creates both load combinations (one for the maximum
and one for the minimum factor), and then automatically creates a third combi-
nation that represents an enveloped combination of the max/min combos.

2.2.2 AASHTO LRFD Code with Caltrans Amendments


Table 2-6 shows the load factors and combinations that are required in accord-
ance with the AASHTO LRFD code with Caltrans amendments.

2.2.3 AASHTO LRFD Code with PennDOT Amendments


Table 2-7 and 2-8 show the load factors and live load vehicles for steel and con-
crete girder bridges, respectively, that are required in accordance with the
AASHTO LRFD code with PennDOT amendments.

2-4 Design Load Combinations


Chapter 2 - Define Loads and Load Combinations

Table 2-3 Load Combinations and Load Factors Used in the AASHTO LRFD Code
DC
DD
DW
EH LL
EV IM
ES CE
Load EL BR
Combo PS PL
Limit CR LS WA WS WL FR TU TU SE EQ IC CT CV
State SH
Str I γP 1.75 1.00 - - 1.00 0.50/ γTG γSE - - - -
1.20
Str II γP 1.35 1.00 - - 1.00 0.50/ γTG γSE - - - -
1.20
Str III γP - 1.00 1.40 - 1.00 0.50/ γTG γSE - - - -
1.20
Str IV γP - 1.00 - - 1.00 0.50/ - - - - - -
1.20
Str V γP 1.35 1.00 0.40 1.00 1.00 0.50/ γTG γSE - - - -
1.20
Ext Ev I γP γEQ 1.00 - - 1.00 - - - 1.00 - - -
Ext Ev II γP 0.5 1.00 - - 1.00 - - - - 1.00 1.00 1.00
Serv I 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.30 1.00 1.00 1.00/ γTG γSE - - - -
1.20
Serv II 1.00 1.30 1.00 - - 1.00 1.00/ - - - - -
1.20
Serv III 1.00 0.80 1.00 - - 1.00 1.00/ γTG γSE - - - -
1.20
Serv IV 1.00 - 1.00 0.70 - 1.00 1.00/ - 1.00 - - - -
1.20
Fatigue I - 1.50 - - - - - - - - - - -
LL, IM &
CE Only
Fatigue II - 0.75 - - - - - - - - - - -
LL, IM &
CE Only

Design Load Combinations 2-5


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Table 2-4 Load Factors for Permanent Loads, γ P , AASHTO LRFD Code
Load Factor
Type of Load Maximum Minimum
DC: Components and Attachments 1.25 0.90
DC: Strength IV only 1.50 0.90
DD: Downdrag
Piles, α Tomlinson Method 1.40 0.25
Piles, λ Method 1.05 0.30
Drilled Shafts, O’Neill and Reese (1999) Method 1.25 0.35
DW: Wearing Surfaces and Utilities 1.50 0.65
EH: Horizontal Earth Pressure
Active 1.50 0.90
At-Rest 1.35 0.90
AEP for Anchored Walls 1.35 N/A
EL: Locked in Construction Stresses 1.00 1.00
EV: Vertical Earth Pressure
Overall Stability 1.00 N/A
Retaining Walls and Abutments 1.35 1.00
Rigid Buried Structure 1.30 0.90
Rigid Frames 1.35 0.90
Flexible Buried Structures other than Metal Box 1.95 0.90
Culverts
1.50 0.90
Flexible Metal Box Culverts
ES: Earth Surcharge 1.50 0.75

Table 2-5 Load Factors for Permanent Loads due to Superimposed Deformations, γP,
AASHTO LRFD Code

Bridge Component PS CR, SH


Superstructures, Segmental 1.0 See Table 2-5,
Concrete Substructures supporting Segmental Super- DC
structures
Concrete Superstructures, non-segmental 1.0 1.0
Substructures supporting non-segmental Superstructures
Using Ig
Using Ieffective 0.5 0.5
1.0 1.0
Steel Substructures 1.0 1.0

2-6 Design Load Combinations


Chapter 2 - Define Loads and Load Combinations

Table 2-6 Load Combinations and Load Factors Used in the AASHTO LRFD Code with Caltrans Amendments
DC
DD
DW
EH LL
EV IM
ES CE
Load EL BR LL-P
Combo PS PL IM
Limit CR LS CE WA WS WL FR TU TU SE EQ IC CT CV
State SH
Str I γP 1.75 - 1.00 - - 1.00 0.50/ γTG γSE - - - -
1.20
Str II γP - 1.35 1.00 - - 1.00 0.50/ γTG γSE - - - -
1.20
Str III γP - - 1.00 1.40 - 1.00 0.50/ γTG γSE - - - -
1.20
Str IV γP - - 1.00 - - 1.00 0.50/ - - - - - -
1.20
Str V γP 1.35 - 1.00 0.40 1.00 1.00 0.50/ γTG γSE - - - -
1.20
Ext Ev I 1.00 γEQ - 1.00 - - 1.00 - - - 1.00 - - -
Ext Ev II 1.00 0.5 - 1.00 - - 1.00 - - - - 1.00 1.00 1.00
Serv I 1.00 1.00 - 1.00 0.30 1.00 1.00 1.00/ γTG γSE - - - -
1.20
Serv II 1.00 1.30 - 1.00 - - 1.00 1.00/ - - - - -
1.20
Serv III 1.00 0.80 - 1.00 - - 1.00 1.00/ γTG γSE - - - -
1.20
Serv IV 1.00 - - 1.00 0.70 - 1.00 1.00/ - 1.00 - - - -
1.20
Fatigue I - 1.75 - - - - - - - - - - - -
LL, IM &
CE Only
Fatigue II - - 1.00 - - - - - - - - - - -
LL-P, IM &
CE Only

Design Load Combinations 2-7


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Table 2-7 Load factors and Live Load Vehicles for Steel Girder Bridge Used in the AASHTO LRFD Code
with PennDOT Amendments
LL
IM
Load Combination Design LL Vehicle
DC DW CE PL WS
Limit State (Load Type)
BR
LS
Str I 1.25/0.90 1.50/0.65 1.75 - - PHL-93 (LL)

Str IP 1.25/0.90 1.50/0.65 1.35 1.75 - PHL-93 (LL)

Str IA 1.25/0.90 1.50/0.65 1.35 - - PHL-93 (LL)

Str II 1.25/0.90 1.50/0.65 1.35 - - P-82 (LL-P)

Str III 1.25/0.90 1.50/0.65 - - 1.40 -

Str IV 1.5 1.50/0.65 - - - -


Str V 1.25/0.90 1.50/0.65 1.35 - 0.40 PHL-93 (LL)
Serv II 1.00 1.00 1.30 - - PHL-93 (LL)
Serv IIA 1.00 1.00 1.00 - - PHL-93 (LL)
Serv IIB 1.00 1.00 1.00 - - P-82 (LL-P)
Fatigue I (infinite) - - 1.50 - - HS20-30(LL-F)
LL, IM & CE Only
Fatigue II (finite) - - 0.75 - - HS20-30(LL-F)
LL, IM & CE Only
DEFL - - 1.00 - - PenDOT Defl Trk
LL, IM CE & BR Only (LL-D)
Const/ Uncured Slab 1.25 1.50/0.65 1.50 - 1.25 User Defined (LL)

2-8 Design Load Combinations


Chapter 2 - Define Loads and Load Combinations

Table 2-8 Load factors and Live Load Vehicles for Prestressed Concrete Girder Bridge Used in the
AASHTO LRFD Code with PennDOT Amendments
LL
IM
Load Combination CR Design LL Vehicle
DC DW CE PL
Limit State SH (Load Type)
BR
LS
Str I 1.25/0.90 1.50/0.65 1.75 - 0.5 PHL-93 (LL)

Str IP 1.25/0.90 1.50/0.65 1.35 1.75 0.5 PHL-93 (LL)

Str IA 1.25/0.90 1.50/0.65 1.35 - 0.5 PHL-93 (LL)

Str II 1.25/0.90 1.50/0.65 1.35 - 0.5 P-82 (LL-P)

Serv I 1.00 1.00 1.00 - 1.00 PHL-93 (LL)

Serv I with PL 1.00 1.00 0.80 1.00 1.00 PHL-93 (LL)


Serv III 1.00 1.00 0.80 - 1.00 PHL-93 (LL)
Serv III with PL 1.00 1.00 0.65 1.00 1.00 PHL-93 (LL)
Serv IIIA 1.00 1.00 1.00 - - Controlling PHL-93
(LL) or P-82 (LL-P)
Serv IIIB 1.00 1.00 1.00 - - Controlling PHL-93
(LL) or P-82 (LL-P)
Fatigue I (infinite) - - 1.50 - - HS20-30(LL-F)
LL, IM & CE Only
DEFL - - 1.00 - - PenDOT Defl Trk
LL, IM CE & BR Only (LL-D)

2.3 Default Load Combinations


Default design load combinations can be activated using the Design/Rating >
Load Combinations > Add Default command. Users can set the load combi-
nations by selecting the “Bridge Design” option, and then choose the amend-
ments from the dropdown box if needed. Users may select the desired limit states
and load cases using the Code Generated Load Combinations for Bridge Design
form. The forms shown in Figure 2-1 to Figure 2-3 illustrate the options when
the AASHTO LRFD code with or without amendments has been selected for
design.

Default Load Combinations 2-9


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Figure 2-1 Code-Generated Load Combinations for Bridge Design Form –


AASHTO LRFD

2 - 10 Default Load Combinations


Chapter 2 - Define Loads and Load Combinations

Figure 2-2 Code-Generated Load Combinations for Bridge Design Form –


AASHTO LRFD with PennDOT Amendments for Steel Girders

Default Load Combinations 2 - 11


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Figure 2-3 Code-Generated Load Combinations for Bridge Design Form –


AASHTO LRFD with PennDOT Amendments for Concrete Girders

After the desired limit states and load cases have been selected, CSiBridge will
generate all of the code-required load combinations. These can be viewed using
the Home > Display > Show Tables command or by using the Show/Modify
button on the Define Combinations form, which is shown in Figure 2-4.

2 - 12 Default Load Combinations


Chapter 2 - Define Loads and Load Combinations

Figure 2-2 Define Load Combinations Form – AASHTO LRFD

The load combinations denoted as Str-I1, Str-I2, and so forth refer to Strength I
load combinations. The load case StrIGroup1 is the name given to enveloped
load combination of all of the Strength I combinations. Enveloped load combi-
nations will allow for some efficiency later when the bridge design requests are
defined (see Chapter 4).

Default Load Combinations 2 - 13


Chapter 3
Live Load Distribution

This chapter describes the algorithms used by CSiBridge to determine the


live load distribution factors used to assign live load demands to individual
girders. An explanation is given with respect to how the distribution factors
are applied in a shear, stress, and moment check.

The live load distribution factors derived using the code-based Method 2 de-
scribed in Section 3.1 of this manual are applicable only to superstructures of
the following types: precast I- or U-girders with composite slabs, steel I-girders
with composite slabs, and multi-cell concrete box girders. These deck section
types may also have the live loads distributed based on Methods 1, 3 or 4 de-
scribed in Section 3.1 of this manual.

Legend:
Girder = beam + tributary area of composite slab
Section Cut = all girders present in the cross-section at the cut location
LLD = Live Load Distribution

3.1 Methods for Determining Live Load Distribution


CSiBridge gives the user a choice of four methods to address distribution of
live load to individual girders.

3-1
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Method 1 – The LLD factors are specified directly by the user.

Method 2 – CSiBridge calculates the LLD factors by following procedures


outlined in AASHTO LRFD Section 4.6.2.2.

Method 3 – CSiBridge reads the calculated live load demands directly from
individual girders (available only for Area models).

Method 4 – CSiBridge distributes the live load uniformly to all girders.

It is important to note that to obtain relevant results, the definition of a


Moving Load case must be adjusted depending on which method is selected.

 When the LLD factors are user specified or specified in accordance with
the code (Method 1 or 2), only one lane with a MultiLane Scale Factor = 1
should be loaded into a Moving Load cases included in the demand set
combinations.

 When CSiBridge reads the LLD factors directly from individual girders
(Method 3, applicable to area and solid models only) or when CSiBridge
applies the LLD factors uniformly (Method 4), multiple traffic lanes with
relevant Multilane Scale Factors should be loaded in accordance with
code requirements.

3.2 Determine Live Load Distribution Factors


At every section cut, the following geometric information is evaluated to
determine the LLD factors.

 span lengththe length of span for which moment or shear is being cal-
culated

 the number of girders

 girder designationthe first and last girder are designated as exterior


girders and the other girders are classified as interior girders

 roadway widthmeasured as the distance between curbs/barriers; medi-


ans are ignored

3-2 Determine Live Load Distribution Factors


Chapter 3 - Live Load Distribution

 overhangconsists of the horizontal distance from the centerline of the


exterior web of the left exterior beam at deck level to the interior edge of
the curb or traffic barrier

 the beamsincludes the area, moment of inertia, torsion constant, center


of gravity

 the thickness of the composite slab t1 and the thickness of concrete slab
haunch t2

 the tributary area of the composite slabwhich is bounded at the interior


girder by the midway distances to neighboring girders and at the exterior
girder; includes the entire overhang on one side, and is bounded by the
midway distances to neighboring girder on the other side

 Young’s modulus for both the slab and the beamsangle of skew support.

CSiBridge then evaluates the longitudinal stiffness parameter, Kg, in accord-


ance with AASHTO LRFD 4.6.2.2 (eq. 4.6.2.2.1-1). The center of gravity of
the composite slab measured from the bottom of the beam is calculated as
the sum of the beam depth, thickness of the concrete slab haunch t2, and
one-half the thickness of the composite slab t1. Spacing of the girders is cal-
culated as the average distance between the centerlines of neighboring gird-
ers.

CSiBridge then verifies that the selected LLD factors are compatible with
the type of model: spine, area, or solid. If the LLD factors are read by
CSiBridge directly from the individual girders, the model type must be area
or solid. This is the case because with the spine model option, CSiBridge
models the entire cross section as one frame element and there is no way to
extract forces on individual girders. All other model types and LLD factor
method permutations are allowed.

3.3 Apply LLD Factors


The application of live load distribution factors varies, depending on which
method has been selected: user specified; in accordance with code; directly
from individual girders; or uniformly distributed onto all girders.

Apply LLD Factors 3-3


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

3.3.1 User Specified


When this method is selected, CSiBridge reads the girder designations (i.e.,
exterior and interior) and assigns live load distribution factors to the indi-
vidual girders accordingly.

3.3.2 Calculated by CSiBridge in Accordance with AASHTO LRFD


When this method is selected, CSiBridge considers the data input by the us-
er for truck wheel spacing, minimum distance from wheel to curb/barrier
and multiple presence factor for one loaded lane.

Depending on the section type, CSiBridge validates several section parame-


ters against requirements specified in the code (AASHTO LRFD Tables
4.6.2.2.2b-1, 4.6.2.2.2d-1, 4.6.2.2.3a-1 and 4.6.2.2.3b-1). When any of the
parameter values are outside the range required by the code, the section cut
is excluded from the Design Request.

At every section cut, CSiBridge then evaluates the live load distribution fac-
tors for moment and shear for exterior and interior girders using formulas
specified in the code (AASHTO LRFD Tables 4.6.2.2.2b-1, 4.6.2.2.2d-1,
4.6.2.2.3a-1 and 4.6.2.2.3b-1). After evaluation, the LLD factor values are as-
signed to individual girders based on their designation (exterior, interior).
The same value equal to the average of the LLD factors calculated for the
left and right girders is assigned to both exterior girders. Similarly, all inte-
rior girders use the same LLD factors equal to the average of the LLD factors
of all of the individual interior girders.

3.3.3 Forces Read Directly from Girders


When this method is selected, CSiBridge sets the live load distribution fac-
tor for all girders to 1.

3.3.4 Uniformly Distributed to Girders


When this method is selected, the live load distribution factor is equal to
1/n where n is the number of girders in the section. All girders have identi-

3-4 Apply LLD Factors


Chapter 3 - Live Load Distribution

cal LLD factors disregarding their designation (exterior, interior) and de-
mand type (shear, moment).

3.4 Generate Virtual Combinations


When the method for determining the live load distribution factors is user-
specified, code-specified, or uniformly distributed (Methods 1, 2 or 4),
CSiBridge generates virtual load combination for every valid section cut se-
lected for design. The virtual combinations are used during a stress check
and check of the shear and moment to calculate the forces on the girders.
After those forces have been calculated, the virtual combinations are delet-
ed. The process is repeated for all section cuts selected for design.

Four virtual COMBO cases are generated for each COMBO that the user has
specified in the Design Request (see Chapter 4). The program analyzes the
design type of each load case present in the user specified COMBO and mul-
tiplies all non-moving load case types by 1/ n (where n is the number of
girders) and the moving load case type by the section cut values of the LLD
factors (exterior moment, exterior shear, interior moment and interior shear
LLD factors). This ensures that dead load is shared evenly by all girders,
while live load is distributed based on the LLD factors.

The program then completes a stress check and a check of the shear and the
moment for each section cut selected for design.

3.4.1 Stress Check


At the Section Cut being analyzed, the girder stresses at all stress output
points are read from CSiBridge for every virtual COMBO generated. To en-
sure that live load demands are shared equally irrespective of lane eccen-
tricity by all girders, CSiBridge uses averaging when calculating the girder
stresses. It calculates the stresses on a beam by integrating axial and M3
moment demands on all the beams in the entire section cut and dividing the
demands by the number of girders. Similarly, P and M3 forces in the com-
posite slab are integrated and stresses are calculated in the individual tribu-
tary areas of the slab by dividing the total slab demand by the number of
girders.

Generate Virtual Combinations 3-5


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

When stresses are read from analysis into design, the stresses are multiplied
by n (where n is number of girders) to make up for the reduction applied in
the Virtual Combinations.

3.4.2 Shear or Moment Check


At the Section Cut being analyzed, the entire section cut forces are read
from CSiBridge for every Virtual COMBO generated. The forces are as-
signed to individual girders based on their designation. (Forces from two
virtual Combinationsone for shear and one for momentgenerated for
exterior beam are assigned to both exterior beams, and similarly, Virtual
Combinations for interior beams are assigned to interior beams.)

3.5 Read Forces/Stresses Directly from Girders


When the method for determining the live load distribution is based on
forces read directly from the girders, the method varies based on which De-
sign Check has been specified in the Design Request (see Chapter 4).

3.5.1 Stress Check


At the Section Cut being analyzed, the girder stresses at all stress output
points are read from CSiBridge for every COMBO specified in the Design
Request. CSiBridge calculates the stresses on a beam by integrating axial,
M3 and M2 moment demands on the beam at the center of gravity of the
beam. Similarly P, M3 and M2 demands in the composite slab are integrated
at the center of gravity of the slab tributary area.

3.5.2 Shear or Moment Check


At the Section Cut being analyzed, the girder forces are read from CSiBridge
for every COMBO specified in the Design Request. CSiBridge calculates the
demands on a girder by integrating axial, M3 and M2 moment demands on
the girder at the center of gravity of the girder.

3-6 Read Forces/Stresses Directly from Girders


Chapter 3 - Live Load Distribution

3.6 LLD Factor Design Example Using Method 2


The AASHTO LRFD Specifications allow the use of advanced methods of
analysis to determine the live load distribution factors. However, for typical
bridges, the specifications list equations to calculate the distribution factors
for different types of bridge superstructures. The types of superstructures
covered by these equations are described in AASHTO LRFD Table 4.6.2.2.1-
1. From this table, bridges with concrete decks supported on precast con-
crete I or bulb-tee girders are designated as cross-section “K.” Other tables
in AASHTO LRFD 4.6.2.2.2 list the distribution factors for interior and ex-
terior girders including cross-section “K.”

The distribution factor equations are largely based on work conducted in


the NCHRP Project 12-26 and have been verified to give accurate results
compared to 3-dimensional bridge analysis and field measurements. The
multiple presence factors are already included in the distribution factor
equations except when the tables call for the use of the lever rule. In these
cases, the computations need to account for the multiple presence factors.
The user is providing those as part of the Design Request definition together
with wheel spacing, curb to wheel distance and lane width.

Notice that the distribution factor tables include a column with the heading
“range of applicability.” The ranges of applicability listed for each equation
are based on the range for each parameter used in the study leading to the
development of the equation. When any of the parameters exceeds the
listed value in the “range of applicability” column, CSiBridge reports the in-
compliance and excludes the section from design.

AASHTO LRFD Article 4.6.2.2.2d of the specifications states: “In beam-slab


bridge cross-sections with diaphragms or cross-frames, the distribution fac-
tor for the exterior beam shall not be taken less than that which would be
obtained by assuming that the cross-section deflects and rotates as a rigid
cross-section.” This provision was added to the specifications because the
original study that developed the distribution factor equations did not con-
sider intermediate diaphragms. Application of this provision requires the
presence of a sufficient number of intermediate diaphragms whose stiffness
is adequate to force the cross section to act as a rigid section. For prestressed
girders, different jurisdictions use different types and numbers of interme-

LLD Factor Design Example Using Method 2 3-7


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

diate diaphragms. Depending on the number and stiffness of the intermedi-


ate diaphragms, the provisions of AASHTO LRFD 4.6.2.2.2d may not be ap-
plicable. If the user specifies option “Yes” in the “Diaphragms Present” op-
tion the program follows the procedure outlined in the provision AASHTO
LRFD 4.6.2.2.2d.

For this example, one deep reinforced concrete diaphragm is located at the
midspan of each span. The stiffness of the diaphragm was deemed sufficient
to force the cross-section to act as a rigid section; therefore, the provisions
of AASHTO LRFD S4.6.2.2.2d apply.

Figure 3-1 General Dimensions

Required information:

AASHTO Type I-Beam (28/72)


Noncomposite beam area, Ag = 1,085 in2
Noncomposite beam moment of inertia, Ig = 733,320 in4
Deck slab thickness, ts = 8 in.
Span length, L = 110 ft.
Girder spacing, S = 9 ft.-8 in.
Modulus of elasticity of the beam, EB = 4,696 ksi
Modulus of elasticity of the deck, ED = 3,834 ksi
C.G. to top of the basic beam = 35.62 in.
C.G. to bottom of the basic beam = 36.38 in.

3-8 LLD Factor Design Example Using Method 2


Chapter 3 - Live Load Distribution

1. Calculate n, the modular ratio between the beam and the deck.

n = EB ED (AASHTO 2014 4.6.2.2.1-2)

= 4696 3834 = 1.225

2. Calculate eg, the distance between the center of gravity of the


noncomposite beam and the deck. Ignore the thickness of the haunch
in determining eg

eg = NAYT + t s 2 = 35.62 + 8 2 = 39.62 in.

3. Calculate Kg, the longitudinal stiffness parameter.

Kg = n ( I + Aeg2 ) (4.6.2.2.1-1)

= 1.225 733 320 + 1 085 ( 39.62 )  =


2
2 984 704 in 4

4. Interior girder. Calculate the moment distribution factor for an interi-


or beam with two or more design lanes loaded using AASHTO LRFD
Table S4.6.2.2.2b-1.

DM = 0.075 + ( S 9.5 ) ( S L )0.2 ( K g )


0.6 0.1
12.0 Lt s 3

{12 (110 )(8) }


0.1
= 0.075 + ( 9.667 9.5 )
0.6
( 9.667 110 )0.2 2 984 704 3


= 0.796 lane (eq. 1)

5. In accordance with AASHTO LRFD 4.6.2.2.2e, a skew correction fac-


tor for moment may be applied for bridge skews greater than 30 de-
grees. The bridge in this example is skewed 20 degrees, and therefore,
no skew correction factor for moment is allowed.

Calculate the moment distribution factor for an interior beam with


one design lane loaded using AASHTO LRFD Table 4.6.2.2.2b-1.

DM = 0.06 + ( S 14 ) ( S L )0.3 ( K g )
0.4 0.1
12.0 Lt s 3

LLD Factor Design Example Using Method 2 3-9


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

{ }
0.1
= 0.06 + ( 9.667 14 )
0.4
( 9.667 110 )0.3 2984704 12 (100 )( 8 ) 
3

 
= 0.542 lane (eq. 2)

Notice that the distribution factor calculated above for a single lane
loaded already includes the 1.2 multiple presence factor for a single
lane, therefore, this value may be used for the service and strength
limit states. However, multiple presence factors should not be used for
the fatigue limit state. Therefore, the multiple presence factor of 1.2
for the single lane is required to be removed from the value calculated
above to determine the factor used for the fatigue limit state.

6. Skew correction factor for shear.

In accordance with AASHTO LRFD 4.6.2.2.3c, a skew correction fac-


tor for support shear at the obtuse corner must be applied to the dis-
tribution factor of all skewed bridges. The value of the correction fac-
tor is calculated using AASHTO LRFD Table 4.6.2.2.3c-1.

SC = 1.0 + 0.20 (12.0 Lt s3 K g ) tan θ


0.3

( )
0.3
= 1.0 + 0.20 12.0 (110 )( 8 ) 2 984 704
3
tan 20

= 1.047

7. Calculate the shear distribution factor for an interior beam with two
or more design lanes loaded using AASHTO LRFD Table S4.6.2.2.3a-1.

DV = 0.2 + ( S 12 ) − ( S 35 )
2

= 0.2 + ( 9.667 12 ) − ( 9.667 35 )


2

= 0.929 lane

Apply the skew correction factor:

DV = 1.047 ( 0.929 ) = 0.973 lane (eq. 4)

3 - 10 LLD Factor Design Example Using Method 2


Chapter 3 - Live Load Distribution

8. Calculate the shear distribution factor for an interior beam with one
design lane loaded using AASHTO LRFD Table S4.6.2.2.3a-1.

DV = 0.36 + ( S 25.0 )

= 0.36 + ( 9.667 25.0 )

= 0.747 lane

Apply the skew correction factor:

DV = 1.047 ( 0.747 )
= 0.782 lane (eq. 5)

9. From (1) and (2), the service and strength limit state moment distribu-
tion factor for the interior girder is equal to the larger of 0.796 and
0.542 lane. Therefore, the moment distribution factor is 0.796 lane.

From (4) and (5), the service and strength limit state shear distribution
factor for the interior girder is equal to the larger of 0.973 and 0.782
lane. Therefore, the shear distribution factor is 0.973 lane.

10. Exterior girder

11. Calculate the moment distribution factor for an exterior beam with
two or more design lanes using AASHTO LRFD Table 4.6.2.2.2d-1.

DM = eDVinterior
e = 0.77 + de 9.1

where de is the distance from the centerline of the exterior girder to


the inside face of the curb or barrier.

e = 0.77 + 1.83/9.1 = 0.97


DM = 0.97(0.796) = 0.772 lane (eq. (7)

12. Calculate the moment distribution factor for an exterior beam with
one design lane using the lever rule in accordance with AASHTO
LRFD Table 4.6.2.2.2d-1.

LLD Factor Design Example Using Method 2 3 - 11


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Figure 3-2 Lever Rule

DM = [( 3.5 + 6 ) + 3.5] 9.667 =


1.344 wheels 2
= 0.672 lane (eq. 8)

Notice that this value does not include the multiple presence factor,
therefore, it is adequate for use with the fatigue limit state. For service
and strength limit states, the multiple presence factor for a single lane
loaded needs to be included.

DM = 0.672 (1.2 )
= 0.806 lane (eq. 9) (Strength and Service)

13. Calculate the shear distribution factor for an exterior beam with two
or more design lanes loaded using AASHTO LRFD Table 4.6.2.2.3b-1.

3 - 12 LLD Factor Design Example Using Method 2


Chapter 3 - Live Load Distribution

DV = eDVinterior

where:

e = 0.6 + de 10
= 0.6 + 1.83 10

= 0.783
DV = 0.783 ( 0.973 )
= 0.762 lane (eq. 10)

14. Calculate the shear distribution factor for an exterior beam with one
design lane loaded using the lever rule in accordance with AASHTO
LRFD Table 4.6.2.2.3b-1. This value will be the same as the moment
distribution factor with the skew correction factor applied.

DV = 1.047 ( 0.806 )
= 0.845 lane (eq. 12) (Strength and Service)

Notice that AASHTO LRFD 4.6.2.2.2d includes additional require-


ments for the calculation of the distribution factors for exterior gird-
ers when the girders are connected with relatively stiff cross-frames
that force the cross-section to act as a rigid section. As indicated in the
introduction, these provisions are applied to this example; the calcula-
tions are shown below.

15. Additional check for rigidly connected girders (AASHTO LRFD


4.6.2.2.2d)

The multiple presence factor, m, is applied to the reaction of the exte-


rior beam (AASHTO LRFD Table 3.6.1.1.2-1)

m1 = 1.20
m2 = 1.00
m3 = 0.85

R = N L N b + X ext (∑ e) ∑ x 2
(4.6.2.2.2d-1)

LLD Factor Design Example Using Method 2 3 - 13


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

where:

R = reaction on exterior beam in terms of lanes

NL = number of loaded lanes under consideration

e = eccentricity of a design truck or a design land load from


the center of gravity of the pattern of girders (ft.)

x = horizontal distance from the center of gravity of the


pattern of girders to each girder (ft.)

Xext = horizontal distance from the center of gravity


of the pattern to the exterior girder (ft.) See Figure 1 for
dimensions.

One lane loaded (only the leftmost lane applied):

R = 1 6 + 24.167 ( 21) 2 ( ( 24.1672 ) + (14.52 ) + ( 4.8332 ) ) 


2 2 2

= 0.1667 + 0.310
= 0.477 (Fatigue)

Add the multiple presence factor of 1.2 for a single lane:

R = 1.2 ( 0.477 )
= 0.572 (Strength)

Two lanes loaded:

R = 2 6 + 24.167 ( 21 + 9 ) 2 ( ( 24.1672 ) + (14.52 ) + ( 4.8332 ) ) 


2 2 2

= 0.333 + 0.443
= 0.776

Add the multiple presence factor of 1.0 for two lanes loaded:

R = 1.0 ( 0.776 )
= 0.776 (Strength)

3 - 14 LLD Factor Design Example Using Method 2


Chapter 3 - Live Load Distribution

Three lanes loaded:

R =
3 6 + 24.167 ( 21 + 9 − 3 ) 2 ( ( 24.1672 ) + (14.52 ) + ( 4.8332 ) ) 
2 2 2

= 0.5 + 0.399
= 0.899

Add the multiple presence factor of 0.85 for three or more lanes load-
ed:

R = 0.85 ( 0.899 )
= 0.764 (Strength)

These values do not control over the distribution factors summarized


in Design Step 16.

16. From (7) and (9), the service and strength limit state moment distribu-
tion factor for the exterior girder is equal to the larger of 0.772 and
0.806 lane. Therefore, the moment distribution factor is 0.806 lane.

From (10) and (12), the service and strength limit state shear distribu-
tion factor for the exterior girder is equal to the larger of 0.762 and
0.845 lane. Therefore, the shear distribution factor is 0.845 lane.

Table 3-1 Summary of Service and Strength Limit State Distribution Factors --
AASHTO LRFD
Moment Moment Shear Shear
interior exterior interior exterior
Load Case beams beams beams beams
Multiple lanes load-
Distribution factors from 0.796 0.772 0.973 0.762
ed
Tables in 4.6.2.2.2
Single lane loaded 0.542 0.806 0.782 0.845
Multiple lanes load-
Additional check for rigidly NA 0.776 NA 0.776
ed
connected girders
Single lane loaded NA 0.572 NA 0.572
Design Value 0.796 0.806 0.973 0.845
Value reported by
0.796 0.807 0.973 0.845
CSiBridge

LLD Factor Design Example Using Method 2 3 - 15


Chapter 4
Define a Bridge Design Request

This chapter describes the Bridge Design Request, which is defined using the
Design/Rating > Superstructure Design > Design Requests command.

Each Bridge Design Request is unique and specifies which bridge object is to
be designed, the type of check to be performed (e.g., concrete box stress, pre-
cast composite stress, and so on), the station range (i.e., the particular zone or
portion of the bridge that is to be designed), the design parameters (i.e., param-
eters that may be used to overwrite the default values automatically set by the
program) and demand sets (i.e., the load combination[s] to be considered).
Multiple Bridge Design Requests may be defined for the same bridge object.

Before defining a design request, the applicable code should be specified using
the Design/Rating > Superstructure > Preferences command. Currently, the
AASHTO STD 2002, AASHTO LRFD 2007, AASHTO LRFD 2012,
CAN/CSA S6, EN 1992, and Indian IRC codes are available for the design of a
concrete box girder; the AASHTO 2007 LRFD, AASHTO LRFD 2012,
AASHTO LRFD 2014, CAN/CSA S6, EN 1992, and Indian IRC codes are
available for the design of a Precast I or U Beam with Composite Slab; the
AASHTO LFRD 2007, AASHTO LRFD 2012, AASHTO LRFD 2014,
CAN/CSA S6, and EN 1992-1-1 are available for Steel I-Beam with Compo-
site Slab superstructures; and the AASHTO LRFD 2012 and AASHTO LRFD
2014 are available for a U tub bridge with a composite slab.

Name and Bridge Object 4-1


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Figure 4-1 shows the Bridge Design Request form when the bridge object is for
a concrete box girder bridge, and the check type is concrete box stress. Figure
4-2 shows the Bridge Design Request form when the bridge object is for a
Composite I or U girder bridge and the check type is precast composite stress.
Figure 4-3 shows the Bridge Design Request form when the bridge object is for
a Steel I-Beam bridge and the check type is composite strength.

Figure 4-1 Bridge Design


Request - Concrete Box
Girder Bridges

4-2 Name and Bridge Object


Chapter 4 - Define a Bridge Design Request

Figure 4-2 Bridge Design


Request - Composite I or
U Girder Bridges

Figure 4-3 Bridge Design


Request – Steel I Beam
with Composite Slab

Name and Bridge Object 4-3


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

4.1 Name and Bridge Object


Each Bridge Design Request must have unique name. Any name can be used.

If multiple Bridge Objects are used to define a bridge model, select the bridge
object to be designed for the Design Request. If a bridge model contains only a
single bridge object, the name of that bridge object will be the only item avail-
able from the Bridge Object drop-down list.

4.2 Check Type


The Check Type refers to the type of design to be performed and the available
options depend on the type of bridge deck being modeled.

For a Concrete Box Girder bridge, CSiBridge provides the following check
type options:

AASHTO STD 2002

 Concrete Box Stress

AASHTO LRFD

 Concrete Box Stress

 Concrete Box Flexure

 Concrete Box Shear and Torsion

 Concrete Box Principal

CAN/CSA S6, and EN 1992-1-1 and IRC: 112

 Concrete Box Stress

 Concrete Box Flexure

 Concrete Box Shear

For Multi-Cell Concrete Box Girder bridge, CSiBridge provides the following
check type options:

4-4 Name and Bridge Object


Chapter 4 - Define a Bridge Design Request

AASHTO LRFD, CAN/CSA S6, EN 1992-1-1, and IRC: 112

 Concrete Box Stress

 Concrete Box Flexure

 Concrete Box Shear

For bridge models with precast I or U Beams with Composite Slabs,


CSiBridge provides three check type options, as follows:

AASHTO LRFD, CAN/CSA S6, EN 1992-1-1, and IRC: 112

 Precast Comp Stress

 Precast Comp Shear

 Precast Comp Flexure

For bridge models with steel I-beam with composite slab superstructures,
CSiBridge provides the following check type option:

AASHTO LRFD

 Steel Comp Strength

 Steel Comp Service

 Steel Comp Fatigue

 Steel Comp Constructability Staged

 Steel Comp Constructability NonStaged

EN 1994-2:2005

 Steel Comp Ultimate

 Steel Comp Service Stresses

 Steel Comp Service Rebar

 Steel Comp Constructability Staged

Check Type 4-5


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

 Steel Comp Constructability NonStaged

For bridge models with steel U-tub with composite slab superstructures,
CSiBridge provides the following check type option:

AASHTO LRFD

 Steel Comp Strength

 Steel Comp Service

 Steel Comp Fatigue

 Steel Comp Constructability Staged

 Steel Comp Constructability NonStaged

The bold type denotes the name that appears in the check type drop-down list.
A detailed description of the design algorithm can be found in Chapter 5 for
concrete box girder bridges, in Chapter 6 for multi-cell box girder bridges, in
Chapter 7 for precast I or U beam with composite slabs, and in Chapter 8 for
steel I-beam with composite slab.

4.3 Station Range


The station range refers to the particular zone or portion of the bridge that is to
be designed. The user may choose the entire length of the bridge, or specify
specific zones using station ranges. Multiple zones (i.e., station ranges) may be
specified as part of a single design request.

When defining a station range, the user specifies the Location Type, which de-
termines if the superstructure forces are to be considered before or at a station
point. The user may choose the location type as before the point, after the
point, or both.

4.4 Design Parameters


Design parameters are overwrites that can be used to change the default values
set automatically by the program. The parameters are specific to each code,

4-6 Station Range


Chapter 4 - Define a Bridge Design Request

deck type, and check type. Figure 4-4 shows the Superstructure Design Request
Parameters form.

Figure 4-3 Superstructure Design Request Parameters form

Table 4-1 shows the parameters for concrete box girder bridges. Table 4-2
shows the parameters for multi-cell concrete box bridges. Table 4-3 shows the
parameters applicable when the superstructure has a deck that includes precast
I or U girders with composite slabs. Table 4-4 shows the parameters applicable
when the superstructure has a deck that includes steel I-beams.

Table 4-1 Design Request Parameters for Concrete Box Girders


AASHTO STD 2002
 Resistance Factor - multiplies both compression and tension
Concrete Box Stress
stress limits
 Multiplier on f ′c to calculate the compression stress limit

 Multiplier on sqrt( f ′c ) to calculate the tension stress limit,


given in the units specified
 The tension limit factor may be specified using either MPa or
ksi units for f ′c and the resulting tension limit

Design Parameters 4-7


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Table 4-1 Design Request Parameters for Concrete Box Girders


AASHTO LRFD
Concrete Box Stress  Concrete Box Stress, PhiC, - Resistance Factor that multi-
plies both compression and tension stress limits
 Concrete Box Stress Factor Compression Limit - Multiplier
on f ′c to calculate the compression stress limit
 Concrete Box Stress Factor Tension Limit Units - Multiplier
on sqrt( f ′c ) to calculate the tension stress limit, given in the
units specified
 Concrete Box Stress Factor Tension Limit - The tension limit
factor may be specified using either MPa or ksi units for f ′c
and the resulting tension limit

Concrete Box Shear  Concrete Box Shear, PhiC, - Resistance Factor that multi-
plies both compression and tension stress limits
 Concrete Box Shear, PhiC, Lightweight Resistance Factor
that multiplies nominal shear resistance to obtain factored
resistance for light-weight concrete
 Include Resal (Hunching-girder) shear effects – Yes or No.
Specifies whether the component of inclined flexural com-
pression or tension, in the direction of the applied shear, in
variable depth members shall or shall not be considered
when determining the design factored shear force in accord-
ance with Article 5.8.6.2.
 Concrete Box Shear Rebar Material - A previously defined
rebar material label that will be used to determine the area
of shear rebar required
 Longitudinal Torsional Rebar Material - A previously defined
rebar material that will be used to determine the area of lon-
gitudinal torsional rebar required
Concrete Box  Concrete Box Flexure, PhiC, - Resistance Factor that multi-
Flexure plies both compression and tension stress limits

Concrete Box  See the Box Stress design parameter specifications


Principal

CAN/CSA S6
Concrete Box Stress  Multi-Cell Concrete Box Stress Factor Compression Limit -
Multiplier on f ′c to calculate the compression stress limit
 Multi-Cell Concrete Box Stress Factor Tension Limit - The
tension limit factor may be specified using either MPa or ksi
units for f ′c and the resulting tension limit

Concrete Box Shear  Phi Concrete ϕc -- Resistance factor for concrete (see CSA

4-8 Design Parameters


Chapter 4 - Define a Bridge Design Request

Table 4-1 Design Request Parameters for Concrete Box Girders


Clause 8.4.6)
 Phi PT ϕp -- Resistance factor for tendons (see CSA Clause
8.4.6)
 Cracking Strength Factor – Multiplies sqrt( f ′c ) to obtain
cracking strength
 EpsilonX Negative Limit -- Longitudinal negative strain limit
(see Clause 8.9.3.8)
 EpsilonX Positive Limit -- Longitudinal positive strain limit
(see Clause 8.9.3.8)
 Tab slab rebar cover – Distance from the outside face of the
top slab to the centerline of the exterior closed transverse
torsion reinforcement
 Web rebar cover – Distance from the outside face of the web
to the centerline of the exterior closed transverse torsion re-
inforcement
 Bottom Slab rebar cover – Distance from the outside face of
the bottoms lab to the centerline of the exterior closed trans-
verse torsion reinforcement
 Shear Rebar Material – A previously defined rebar material
label that will be used to determine the required area of
transverse rebar in the girder
 Longitudinal Rebar Material – A previously defined rebar
material that will be used to determine the required area of
longitudinal rebar in the girder
Concrete Box  Phi Concrete ϕc -- Resistance factor for concrete (see CSA
Flexure Clause 8.4.6)
 Phi Pt ϕp -- Resistance factor for tendons (see CSA Clause
8.4.6)
 Phi Rebar ϕs -- Resistance factor for reinforcing bars (see
CSA Clause 8.4.6)

Eurocode EN 1992
Concrete Box Stress  Compression limit – Multiplier on fc k to calculate the com-
pression stress limit
 Tension limit – Multiplier on fc k to calculate the tension
stress limit
Concrete Box Shear  Gamma C for Concrete – Partial factor for concrete.
 Gamma C for Rebar – Partial safety factor for reinforcing
steel.
 Gamma C for PT – Partial safety factor for prestressing
steel.
 Angle Theta – The angle between the concrete compression
strut and the beam axis perpendicular to the shear force.

Design Parameters 4-9


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Table 4-1 Design Request Parameters for Concrete Box Girders


The value must be between 21.8 degrees and 45 degrees.
 Factor for PT Duct Diameter – Factor that multiplies post-
tensioning duct diameter when evaluating the nominal web
thickness in accordance with section 6.2.3(6) of the code.
Typical values 0.5 to 1.2.
 Factor for PT Transmission Length – Factor for the trans-
mission length of the post tensioning used in shear re-
sistance equation 6.4 of the code. Typical value 1.0 for post
tensioning.
 Inner Arm Method – The method used to calculate the inner
lever arm “z” of the section (integer).
 Inner Arm Limit – Factor that multiplies the depth of the sec-
tion to get the lower limit of the inner lever arm “z” of the sec-
tion.
 Effective Depth Limit – Factor that multiplies the depth of the
section to get the lower limit of the effective depth to the ten-
sile reinforcement “d” of the section.
 Type of Section – Type of section for shear design.
 Determining Factor Nu1 – Method that will be used to calcu-
late the η1 factor.
 Factor Nu1 – η1 factor
 Determining Factor AlphaCW – Method that will be used to
calculate the αcw factor.
 Factor AlphaCW – αcw factor
 Factor Fywk – Multiplier of vertical shear rebar characteristic
yield strength to obtain a stress limit in shear rebar used in
6.10.aN. Typical value 0.8 to 1.0.
 Shear Rebar Material – A previously defined material label
that will be used to determine the required area of transverse
rebar in the girder.
 Longitudinal Rebar Material – A previously defined material
that will be used to determine the required area of longitudi-
nal rebar in the girder.
Concrete Box  Gamma c for Concrete – Partial safety factor for concrete.
Flexure
 Gamma c for Rebar – Partial safety factor for reinforcing
steel.
 Gamma c for PT – Partial safety factor for prestressing steel.
 PT pre-strain – Factor to estimate pre-strain in the post-
tensioning. Multiplies fpk to obtain the stress in the tendons
after losses. Typical value between 0.4 and 0.9.

4 - 10 Design Parameters
Chapter 4 - Define a Bridge Design Request

Table 4-2 Design Request Parameters for Multi-Cell Concrete Box


AASHTO LRFD
Multi-Cell Concrete  Multi-Cell Concrete Box Stress, PhiC, - Resistance Factor
Box Stress that multiplies both compression and tension stress limits
 Multi-Cell Concrete Box Stress Factor Compression Limit -
Multiplier on f ′c to calculate the compression stress limit
 Multi-Cell Concrete Box Stress Factor Tension Limit Units -
Multiplier on sqrt ( f ′c ) to calculate the tension stress limit,
given in the units specified
 Multi-Cell Concrete Box Stress Factor Tension Limit - The
tension limit factor may be specified using either MPa or ksi
units for f ′c and the resulting tension limit
Multi-Cell Concrete  Multi-Cell Concrete Box Shear, PhiC, - Resistance Factor
Box Shear that multiplies both compression and tension stress limits
 Multi-Cell Concrete Box Shear, PhiC, Lightweight Re-
sistance Factor that multiplies nominal shear resistance to
obtain factored resistance for light-weight concrete
 Negative limit on strain in nonprestressed longitudinal rein-
forcement – in accordance with section 5.8.3.4.2; Default
Value = -0.4x10-3, Typical value(s): 0 to -0.4x10-3
 Positive limit on strain in nonprestressed longitudinal rein-
forcement - in accordance with section 5.8.3.4.2; Default
Value = 6.0x10-3, Typical value(s): 6.0x10-3
 PhiC for Nu - Resistance Factor used in equation 5.8.3.5-1;
Default Value = 1.0, Typical value(s): 0.75 to 1.0
 Phif for Mu - Resistance Factor used in equation 5.8.3.5-1;
Default Value = 0.9, Typical value(s): 0.9 to 1.0
 Specifies which method for shear design will be used – ei-
ther Modified Compression Field Theory (MCFT) in accord-
ance with 5.8.3.4.2 or Vci Vcw method in accordance with
5.8.3.4.3. Currently only the MCFT option is available.
 A previously defined rebar material label that will be used to
determine the required area of transverse rebar in the girder.

 A previously defined rebar material that will be used to de-


termine the required area of longitudinal rebar in the girder
Multi-Cell Concrete  Multi-Cell Concrete Box Flexure, PhiC, - Resistance Factor
Box Flexure that multiplies both compression and tension stress limits

CAN/CSA S6

Design Parameters 4 - 11
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Table 4-2 Design Request Parameters for Multi-Cell Concrete Box


Multi-Cell Concrete  Multi-Cell Concrete Box Stress Factor Compression Limit -
Box Stress Multiplier on f ′c to calculate the compression stress limit
 Multi-Cell Concrete Box Stress Factor Tension Limit - The
tension limit factor may be specified using either MPa or ksi
units for f ′c and the resulting tension limit
Multi-Cell Concrete  Highway Class – The highway class shall be determined in
Box Shear accordance with CSA Clause 1.4.2.2, Table 1.1 for the av-
erage daily traffic and average daily truck traffic volumes for
which the structure is designed
 Phi Concrete ϕc -- Resistance factor for concrete (see CSA
Clause 8.4.6)
 Phi PT ϕp -- Resistance factor for tendons (see CSA Clause
8.4.6)
 Phi Rebar ϕs -- Resistance factor for reinforcing bars (see
CSA Clause 8.4.6)
 Cracking Strength Factor -- Multiplies sqrt( f ′c ) to obtain
cracking strength
 EpsilonX Negative Limit -- Longitudinal negative strain limit
(see Clause 8.9.3.8)
 EpsilonX Positive Limit -- Longitudinal positive strain limit
(see Clause 8.9.3.8)
 Shear Rebar Material – A previously defined rebar material
that will be used to determine the required area of trans-
verse rebar in the girder
 Longitudinal Rebar Material – A previously defined rebar
material that will be used to determine the required area of
longitudinal rebar in the girder
Multi-Cell Concrete  Highway Class – The highway class shall be determined in
Box Flexure accordance with CSA Clause 1.4.2.2, Table 1.1 for the av-
erage daily traffic and average daily truck traffic volumes for
which the structure is designed
 Phi Concrete ϕc -- Resistance factor for concrete (see CSA
Clause 8.4.6)
 Phi PT ϕp -- Resistance factor for tendons (see CSA Clause
8.4.6)
 Phi Rebar ϕs -- Resistance factor for reinforcing bars (see
CSA Clause 8.4.6)

Eurocode EN 1992
Multi-Cell Concrete  Compression limit – Multiplier on fc k to calculate the com-
Box Stress pression stress limit

4 - 12 Design Parameters
Chapter 4 - Define a Bridge Design Request

Table 4-2 Design Request Parameters for Multi-Cell Concrete Box


 Tension limit – Multiplier on fc k to calculate the tension
stress limit
Multi-Cell Concrete  Gamma C for Concrete – Partial factor for concrete.
Box Shear
 Gamma C for Rebar – Partial safety factor for reinforcing
steel.
 Gamma C for PT – Partial safety factor for prestressing
steel.
 Angle Theta – The angle between the concrete compression
strut and the beam axis perpendicular to the shear force.
The value must be between 21.8 degrees and 45 degrees.
 Factor for PT Duct Diameter – Factor that multiplies post-
tensioning duct diameter when evaluating the nominal web
thickness in accordance with section 6.2.3(6) of the code.
Typical values 0.5 to 1.2.
 Factor for PT Transmission Length – Factor for the trans-
mission length of the post tensioning used in shear re-
sistance equation 6.4 of the code. Typical value 1.0 for post
tensioning.
 Inner Arm Method – The method used to calculate the inner
lever arm “z” of the section (integer).
 Inner Arm Limit – Factor that multiplies the depth of the sec-
tion to get the lower limit of the inner lever arm “z” of the sec-
tion.
 Effective Depth Limit – Factor that multiplies the depth of the
section to get the lower limit of the effective depth to the ten-
sile reinforcement “d” of the section.
 Type of Section – Type of section for shear design.
 Determining Factor Nu1 – Method that will be used to calcu-
late the η1 factor.
 Factor Nu1 – η1 factor
 Determining Factor AlphaCW – Method that will be used to
calculate the αcw factor.
 Factor AlphaCW – αcw factor
 Factor Fywk – Multiplier of vertical shear rebar characteristic
yield strength to obtain a stress limit in shear rebar used in
6.10.aN. Typical value 0.8 to 1.0.
 Shear Rebar Material – A previously defined material label
that will be used to determine the required area of transverse
rebar in the girder.
 Longitudinal Rebar Material – A previously defined material
that will be used to determine the required area of longitudi-
nal rebar in the girder.

Design Parameters 4 - 13
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Table 4-2 Design Request Parameters for Multi-Cell Concrete Box


Multi-Cell Concrete  Gamma c for Concrete – Partial safety factor for concrete.
Box Flexure
 Gamma c for Rebar – Partial safety factor for reinforcing
steel.
 Gamma c for PT – Partial safety factor for prestressing steel.
 PT pre-strain – Factor to estimate pre-strain in the post-
tensioning. Multiplies fpk to obtain the stress in the tendons
after losses. Typical value between 0.4 and 0.9.

Table 4-3 Design Request Parameters for Precast I or U Beams


AASHTO LRFD
Precast Comp  Precast Comp Stress, PhiC, - Resistance Factor that multi-
Stress plies both compression and tension stress limits
 Precast Comp Stress Factor Compression Limit - Multiplier
on f′c to calculate the compression stress limit
 Precast Comp Stress Factor Tension Limit Units - Multiplier
on sqrt(f′c) to calculate the tension stress limit, given in the
units specified
 Precast Comp Stress Factor Tension Limit - The tension limit
factor may be specified using either MPa or ksi units for f′c
and the resulting tension limit
Precast Comp  PhiC, - Resistance Factor that multiplies both compression
Shear and tension stress limits
 PhiC, Lightweight Resistance Factor that multiplies nominal
shear resistance to obtain factored resistance for light-weight
concrete
 Negative limit on strain in nonprestressed longitudinal rein-
forcement – in accordance with section 5.8.3.4.2; Default
Value = -0.4x10-3, Typical value(s): 0 to -0.4x10-3

4 - 14 Design Parameters
Chapter 4 - Define a Bridge Design Request

Table 4-3 Design Request Parameters for Precast I or U Beams


 Positive limit on strain in nonprestressed longitudinal rein-
forcement - in accordance with section 5.8.3.4.2; Default Val-
ue = 6.0x10-3, Typical value(s): 6.0x10-3
 PhiC for Nu - Resistance Factor used in equation 5.8.3.5-1;
Default Value = 1.0, Typical value(s): 0.75 to 1.0
 Phif for Mu - Resistance Factor used in equation 5.8.3.5-1;
Default Value = 0.9, Typical value(s): 0.9 to 1.0
 Specifies what method for shear design will be used - either
Modified Compression Field Theory (MCFT) in accordance
with 5.8.3.4.2 or Vci Vcw method in accordance with 5.8.3.4.3
Currently only the MCFT option is available.
 A previously defined rebar material label that will be used to
determine the required area of transverse rebar in the girder
 A previously defined rebar material that will be used to deter-
mine the required area of longitudinal rebar in the girder
Precast Comp  Precast Comp Flexure, PhiC, - Resistance Factor that multi-
Flexure plies both compression and tension stress limits
CAN/CSA S6
Precast Comp  Precast Comp Stress Factor Compression Limit - Multiplier
Stress on f′c to calculate the compression stress limit
 Precast Comp Stress Factor Tension Limit - The tension limit
factor may be specified using either MPa or ksi units for f′c
and the resulting tension limit
Precast Comp  Highway Class – The highway class shall be determined in
Shear accordance with CSA Clause 1.4.2.2, Table 1.1 for the aver-
age daily traffic and average daily truck traffic volumes for
which the structure is designed
 Phi Concrete ϕc -- Resistance factor for concrete (see CSA
Clause 8.4.6)
 Phi PT ϕp -- Resistance factor for tendons (see CSA Clause
8.4.6)
 Phi Rebar ϕs -- Resistance factor for reinforcing bars (see
CSA Clause 8.4.6)
 Cracking Strength Factor -- Multiplies sqrt( f ′c ) to obtain
cracking strength
 EpsilonX Negative Limit -- Longitudinal negative strain limit
(see Clause 8.9.3.8)
 EpsilonX Positive Limit -- Longitudinal positive strain limit (see
Clause 8.9.3.8)
 Shear Rebar Material – A previously defined rebar material
label that will be used to determine the required area of trans-
verse rebar in the girder.

Design Parameters 4 - 15
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Table 4-3 Design Request Parameters for Precast I or U Beams


 Longitudinal Rebar Material – A previously defined rebar ma-
terial that will be used to determine the required area of longi-
tudinal rebar n the girder
Precast Comp  Highway Class – The highway class shall be determined in
Flexure accordance with CSA Clause 1.4.2.2, Table 1.1 for the aver-
age daily traffic and average daily truck traffic volumes for
which the structure is designed
 Phi Concrete ϕc -- Resistance factor for concrete (see CSA
Clause 8.4.6)
 Phi PT ϕp -- Resistance factor for tendons (see CSA Clause
8.4.6)
 Phi Rebar ϕs -- Resistance factor for reinforcing bars (see
CSA Clause 8.4.6)
Eurocode EN 1992
Precast Comp  Compression limit – Multiplier on fc k to calculate the com-
Stress pression stress limit
 Tension limit – Multiplier on fc k to calculate the tension stress
limit
Precast Comp  Gamma C for Concrete – Partial factor for concrete.
Shear
 Gamma C for Rebar – Partial safety factor for reinforcing
steel.
 Gamma C for PT – Partial safety factor for prestressing steel.
 Angle Theta – The angle between the concrete compression
strut and the beam axis perpendicular to the shear force. The
value must be between 21.8 degrees and 45 degrees.
 Factor for PT Transmission Length – Factor for the transmis-
sion length of the post tensioning used in shear resistance
equation 6.4 of the code. Typical value 1.0 for post tension-
ing.
 Inner Arm Method – The method used to calculate the inner
lever arm “z” of the section (integer).
 Inner Arm Limit – Factor that multiplies the depth of the sec-
tion to get the lower limit of the inner lever arm “z” of the sec-
tion.
 Effective Depth Limit – Factor that multiplies the depth of the
section to get the lower limit of the effective depth to the ten-
sile reinforcement “d” of the section.
 Type of Section – Type of section for shear design.
 Determining Factor Nu1 – Method that will be used to calcu-
late the η1 factor.
 Factor Nu1 – η1 factor

4 - 16 Design Parameters
Chapter 4 - Define a Bridge Design Request

Table 4-3 Design Request Parameters for Precast I or U Beams


 Determining Factor AlphaCW – Method that will be used to
calculate the αcw factor.
 Factor AlphaCW – αcw factor
 Factor Fywk – Multiplier of vertical shear rebar characteristic
yield strength to obtain a stress limit in shear rebar used in
6.10.aN. Typical value 0.8 to 1.0.
 Shear Rebar Material – A previously defined material label
that will be used to determine the required area of transverse
rebar in the girder.
 Longitudinal Rebar Material – A previously defined material
that will be used to determine the required area of longitudinal
rebar in the girder.
Precast Comp  Gamma c for Concrete – Partial safety factor for concrete.
Flexure
 Gamma c for Rebar – Partial safety factor for reinforcing
steel.
 Gamma c for PT – Partial safety factor for prestressing steel.
 PT pre-strain – Factor to estimate pre-strain in the post-
tensioning. Multiplies fpk to obtain the stress in the tendons af-
ter losses. Typical value between 0.4 and 0.9.

Table 4-4 Design Request Parameters for Steel I-Beam


AASHTO LRFD
Steel I-Beam -  Resistance factor Phi for flexure
Strength
 Resistance factor Phi for shear
 Do webs have longitudinal stiffeners?
 Use Stage Analysis load case to determine stresses on com-
posite section?
 Multiplies short term modular ratio (Es/Ec) to obtain long-term
modular ratio
 Use AASHTO, Appendix A to determine resistance in nega-
tive moment regions?
Steel I Beam Comp -  Use Stage Analysis load case to determine stresses on com-
Service posite section?
 Shored Construction?
 Does concrete slab resist tension?
 Multiplies short term modular ratio (Es/Ec) to obtain long-term
modular ratio

Design Parameters 4 - 17
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Table 4-4 Design Request Parameters for Steel I-Beam


Steel-I Comp -  There are no user defined design request parameters for
Fatigue fatigue
Steel I Comp  Resistance factor Phi for flexure
Construct Stgd
 Resistance factor Phi for shear
 Resistance factor Phi for Concrete in Tension
 Do webs have longitudinal stiffeners?

 Concrete modulus of rupture factor in accordance with


AASHTO LRFD Section 5.4.2.6, factor that multiplies sqrt of
f'c to obtain modulus of rupture, default value 0.24 (ksi) or
0.63 (MPa), must be > 0
 The modulus of rupture factor may be specified using either
MPa or ksi units
Steel I Comp  Resistance factor Phi for flexure
Construct Non Stgd
 Resistance factor Phi for shear
 Resistance factor Phi for Concrete in Tension
 Do webs have longitudinal stiffeners?
 Concrete modulus of rupture factor in accordance with
AASHTO LRFD Section 5.4.2.6, factor that multiplies sqrt of
f'c to obtain modulus of rupture, default value 0.24 (ksi) or
0.63 (MPa), must be > 0
 The modulus of rupture factor may be specified using either
MPa or ksi units

4.5 Demand Sets


A demand set name is required for each load combination that is to be consid-
ered in a design request. The load combinations may be selected from a list of
user defined or default load combinations that are program determined (see
Chapter 2).

4.6 Live Load Distribution Factors


When the superstructure has a deck that includes precast I or U girders with
composite slabs or multi-cell boxes, Live Load Distribution Factors can be
specified. LLD factors are described in Chapter 3.

4 - 18 Demand Sets
Chapter 5
Design Concrete Box Girder Bridges

This chapter describes the algorithms applied in accordance with the


AASHTO LRFD 2014 (AASHTO LRFD) for design and stress check of the
superstructure of a concrete box type bridge deck section.

When interim revisions of the codes are published by the relevant authori-
ties, and (when applicable) they are subsequently incorporated into
CSiBridge, the program gives the user an option to select what type of inter-
ims shall be used for the design. The user has an option to select “No Interims”
or “YYYY Interims” on the Bridge Design Preferences form. The interims can
be selected by clicking on the Code Preferences button.

In CSiBridge, when distributing loads for concrete box design, the section is
always treated as one beam; all load demands (permanent and transient) are
distributed evenly to the webs for stress and flexure and proportionally to the
slope of the web for shear. Torsion effects are always considered and assigned
to the outer webs and the top and bottom slabs.

The revisions published in the 2015 interims were incorporated into the Flex-
ure Design.

5-1
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

5.1 Stress Design AASHTO LRFD

5.1.1 Capacity Parameters


PhiC – Resistance Factor; Default Value = 1.0, Typical value: 1.0
The compression and tension limits are multiplied by the φ C factor

FactorCompLim – f ′c multiplier; Default Value = 0.4; Typical values: 0.4 to


0.6. The f ′c is multiplied by the FactorCompLim to obtain the compression
limit.

FactorTensLim – f ′c multiplier; Default Values = 0.19 (ksi), 0.5(MPa);


Typical values: 0 to 0.24 (ksi), 0 to 0.63 (MPa). The f ′c is multiplied by
the FactorTensLim to obtain the tension limit.

5.1.2 Algorithm
The stresses are evaluated at three points at the top fiber and three points at
the bottom fiber: extreme left, Bridge Layout Line, and extreme right. The
stresses assume linear distribution and take into account axial (P) and both
bending moments (M2 and M3).

The stresses are evaluated for each demand set (Chapter 4). If the demand set
contains live load, the program positions the load to capture extreme stress at
each of the evaluation points.

Extremes are found for each point and the controlling demand set name is
recorded.

The stress limits are evaluated by applying the Capacity Parameters (see Sec-
tion 6.2.1).

5.1.3 Stress Design Example


Cross Section: AASHTO Box Beam, Type BIII-48 as shown in Figure 5-1

5-2 Stress Design AASHTO LRFD


Chapter 5 - Design Concrete Box Girder Bridges

Figure 5-1 AASHTO LRFD Stress Design, AASHTO Box Beam, Type BIII-48

Concrete unit weight, w c = 0.150 kcf


Concrete strength at 28 days, f ′c = 5.0 ksi
Design span = 95.0 ft
Prestressing strands: ½ in. dia., seven wire, low relaxation
Area of one strand = 0.153 in2
Ultimate strength f pu = 270.0 ksi
Yield strength f py = 0.9 ksi
f pu = 243 ksi
Modulus of elasticity, E p = 28500 ksi

Stress Design AASHTO LRFD 5-3


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Figure 5-2 Reinforcement, AASHTO LRFD Stress Design


AASHTO Box Beam, Type BIII-48

Reinforcing bars:
yield strength, f y = 60.0 ksi

Section Properties
A = area of cross-section of beam = 826 in2
h = overall depth of precast beam = 39 in
I = moment of inertia about centroid of the beam = 170812 in4
y b ,y t = distance from centroid to the extreme
bottom (top) fiber of the beam = 19.5 in

Demand forces from Dead and PT (COMB1) at station 570:


P = −856.51 kip
M3 = −897.599 kip-in

Top fiber stress =


P M −856.51 −897.599
σtop = − 3 ytop = − 19.5 =−0.9344 ksi
A I 826 170812

5-4 Stress Design AASHTO LRFD


Chapter 5 - Design Concrete Box Girder Bridges

Bottom fiber stress =


P M −856.51 −897.599
σbot = + 3 ybot = + 19.5 =−1.139 ksi
A I 826 170812
Stresses reported by CSiBridge:
top fiber stress envelope = −0.9345 ksi
bottom fiber stress envelope = −1.13945 ksi

5.2 Flexure Design AASHTO LRFD

5.2.1 Capacity Parameters


PhiC – Resistance Factor; Default Value = 1.0, Typical value: 1.0
The nominal flexural capacity is multiplied by the resistance factor to obtain
factored resistance.

5.2.2 Variables
A PS Area of PT in the tension zone

AS Area of reinforcement in the tension zone

A slab Area of the slab

b slab Effective flange width = horizontal width of the slab, measured from
out to out

b webeq Equivalent thickness of all webs in the section

dP Distance from the extreme compression fiber to the centroid of the


prestressing tendons

dS Distance from the extreme compression fiber to the centroid of rebar


in the tension zone

f ps Average stress in prestressing steel (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-1)

f pu Specified tensile strength of prestressing steel (area weighted average


of all tendons in the tensile zone)

Flexure Design AASHTO LRFD 5-5


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

f py Yield tensile strength of prestressing steel (area weighted average of


all tendons in the tensile zone)

fy Yield strength of rebar

k PT material constant (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-2)

Mn Nominal flexural resistance

Mr Factored flexural resistance

t slabeq Equivalent thickness of the slab

𝛼𝛼1 Stress block factor, as specified in AASHTO LRFD 2015 Interim Sec-
tion 5.7.2.2.

β1 Stress block factor, as specified in AASHTO LRFD Section 5.7.2.2.

φ Resistance factor for flexure

5.2.3 Design Process


The derivation of the moment resistance of the section is based on the ap-
proximate stress distribution specified in AASHTO LRFD Article 5.7.2.2. The
natural relationship between concrete stress and strain is considered satisfied
by an equivalent rectangular concrete compressive stress block of 𝛼𝛼1 𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ over
a zone bounded by the edges of the cross-section and a straight line located
parallel to the neutral axis at the distance a = β 1 c from the extreme compres-
sion fiber. If the AASHTO LRFD 2015 interim is selected the factor 𝛼𝛼1 is
taken as 0.85 for specified compressive strengths not exceeding 10.0 ksi. For
specified concrete compressive strengths exceeding 10.0ksi, 𝛼𝛼1 is reduced at
rate of 0.02 for each 1.0ksi of strength in excess of 10.0ksi, except that 𝛼𝛼1 is
not taken less than 0.75. For AASHTO LRFD no interim the 𝛼𝛼1 is always taken
as 0.85 independent of concrete compressive strength. The distance c is meas-
ured perpendicular to the neutral axis. The factor β 1 is taken as 0.85 for con-
crete strengths not exceeding 4.0 ksi. For concrete strengths exceeding 4.0
ksi, β 1 is reduced at a rate of 0.05 for each 1.0 ksi of strength in excess of 4.0
ksi, except that β 1 is not to be taken to be less than 0.65.

5-6 Flexure Design AASHTO LRFD


Chapter 5 - Design Concrete Box Girder Bridges

The flexural resistance is determined in accordance with AASHTO LRFD


Paragraph 5.7.3.2. The resistance is evaluated for bending about horizontal
axis 3 only. Separate capacity is calculated for positive and negative moment.
The capacity is based on bonded tendons and mild steel located in the tension
zone as defined in the Bridge Object. Tendons and mild steel reinforcement
located in the compression zone are not considered. It is assumed that all de-
fined tendons in a section, stressed or not, have f pe (effective stress after loses)
larger than 0.5 f pu (specified tensile strength). If a certain tendon should not
be considered for the flexural capacity calculation, its area must be set to zero.

The section properties are calculated for the section before skew, grade, and
superelevation have been applied. This is consistent with the demands being
reported in the section local axis. It is assumed that the effective width of the
flange (slab) in compression is equal to the width of the slab.

5.2.4 Algorithm
At each section:

 All section properties and demands are converted from CSiBridge model
units to N, mm.

 The equivalent slab thickness is evaluated based on the slab area and slab
width, assuming a rectangular shape.

Aslab
tslabeq =
bslab

 The equivalent web thickness is evaluated as the summation of all web hor-
izontal thicknesses.
nweb
bwebeq = ∑b
1
web

 The 𝛼𝛼1 stress block factor is evaluated in accordance with AASHTO LRFD
5.7.2.2 based on section f ′c

– For AASHTO LRFD 2015 Interim

Flexure Design AASHTO LRFD 5-7


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ − 10
𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ > 10.0𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘, 𝑡𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝛼𝛼 1 = 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 �0.85 − 0.02; 0.75�
1.0

else 𝛼𝛼1 = 0.85

– For AASHTO LRFD No Interim

𝛼𝛼1 = 0.85

 The β 1 stress block factor is evaluated in accordance with AASHTO LRFD


5.7.2.2 based on section f ′c

 f ′ − 28 
– If f ′c > 28 MPa, then
= β1 max  0.85 − c 0.05; 0.65  ;
 7 

else β1 =0.85.

 The tendon and rebar location, area, and material are read. Only bonded
tendons are processed; unbonded tendons are ignored.

Tendons and rebar are split into two groups depending on which sign of
moment they resistnegative or positive. A tendon or rebar is considered
to resist a positive moment when it is located outside of the top fiber com-
pression stress block and is considered to resist a negative moment when it
is located outside of the bottom fiber compression stress block. The com-
pression stress block extends over a zone bounded by the edges of the cross-
section and a straight line located parallel to the neutral axis at the distance
a = β 1 c from the extreme compression fiber. The distance c is measured
perpendicular to the neutral axis.

For each tendon group, an area weighted average of the following values is
determined:

– sum of the tendon areas, A PS

– distance from the extreme compression fiber to the centroid of pre-


stressing tendons, d P

– specified tensile strength of prestressing steel, f pu

– constant k (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-2)

5-8 Flexure Design AASHTO LRFD


Chapter 5 - Design Concrete Box Girder Bridges

For each rebar group, the following values are determined:

– sum of the tension rebar areas, A s

– distance from the extreme compression fiber to the centroid of the ten-
sion rebar, d s

 The distance c between the neutral axis and the compressive face is evalu-
ated in accordance with (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-4).

APS f PU + As f s
c=
f pu
α1 f ′cβ1bslab + kAPS
dp

 The distance c is compared against requirement of Section 5.7.2.1 to verify


if stress in mild reinforcement f s can be taken as equal to f y . The limit on
ratio c/d s is calculated depending on what kind of code and its interim are
specified in the Bridge Design Preferences form as shown in the table be-
low:

Code AASHTO LRFD 2012 AASHTO LRFD 2012


No Interims with 2013 Interims or
later
𝑐𝑐 0.6 0.003

𝑑𝑑𝑠𝑠 0.003 + 𝜀𝜀𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐

where the compression control strain limit 𝜀𝜀𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 is per AASHTO LRFD 2013
Interims table C5.7.2.1-1

When the limit is not satisfied the stress in mild reinforcement f s is re-
duced to satisfy the requirement of Section 5.7.2.1.

 The distance c is compared to the equivalent slab thickness to determine if


the section is a T-section or rectangular section.

Flexure Design AASHTO LRFD 5-9


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

– If cβ1 > tslabeq , the section is a T-section.

 If the section is a T-section, the distance c is recalculated in accordance


with (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-3).

APS f PU + As f s − α1 f ′c ( bslab − bwebeq ) tslabeq


c=
f pu
α1 f ′c β1bwebeq + kAPS
y pt

 Average stress in prestressing steel f ps is calculated in accordance with


(AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-1).

 c 
=
fPS fPU  1 − k 
 dp 

 Nominal flexural resistance M n is calculated in accordance with (AASHTO


LRFD eq. 5.7.3.2.2-1).

– If the section is a T-section,

 cβ   cβ   cβ tslabeq 
M n APS f PS  d p − 1  + AS f s  d s − 1  + α1 f ′c ( bslab − bwebeq ) tslabeq  1 −
= ;
 2   2   2 2 
else

 cβ   cβ 
=
M n APS f PS  d p − 1  + AS f s  d s − 1  .
 2   2 

 Factored flexural resistance is obtained by multiplying M n by φ.

M r = φM n
 Extreme moment M3 demands are found from the specified demand sets
and the controlling demand set name is recorded.

5.2.5 Flexure Design Example


Cross Section: AASHTO Box Beam, Type BIII-48, as shown in Figure 5-3.

5 - 10 Flexure Design AASHTO LRFD


Chapter 5 - Design Concrete Box Girder Bridges

Concrete unit weight, w c = 0.150 kcf


Concrete strength at 28 days, f ′c = 5.0 ksi (~34.473 MPa)
Design span = 95.0 ft
Prestressing strands: ½ in. dia., seven wire, low relaxation
Area of one strand = 0.153 in2
Ultimate strength f pu = 270.0 ksi
Yield strength f py = 0.9 ksi
f pu = 243 ksi
Modulus of elasticity, E p = 28 500 ksi
Reinforcing bar yield strength, f y = 60.0 ksi

Figure 5-3 LRFD Flexure Design


Cross-Section, AASHTO Box Beam, Type BIII-48

Flexure Design AASHTO LRFD 5 - 11


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Figure 5-4 Reinforcement, AASHTO LRFD Flexure Design


Cross-Section, AASHTO Box Beam, Type BIII-48

Section Properties
A = area of cross-section of beam = 826 in2
h = overall depth of precast beam = 39 in
I = moment of inertia about centroid of the beam =
170812 in4
y b , y t = distance from centroid to the extreme
bottom (top) fiber of the beam = 19.5 in
Demand forces from Dead and PT (COMB1) at station 570:
P = −856.51 kip
M3 = −897.599 kip-in
 The equivalent slab thickness is evaluated based on the slab area and slab
width, assuming a rectangular shape.

Aslab 48 × 5.5
=
tslabeq = = 5.5in
bslab 48
Value reported by CSiBridge = 5.5 in

 The equivalent web thickness is evaluated as the summation of all web hor-
izontal thicknesses.

5 - 12 Flexure Design AASHTO LRFD


Chapter 5 - Design Concrete Box Girder Bridges

nweb
bwebeq = ∑b
1
web = 5 + 5 = 10 in

Value reported by CSiBridge = 10.0 in

Tendons are split into two groups depending on which sign of moment they
resistnegative or positive. A tendon is considered to resist a positive mo-
ment when it is located outside of the top fiber compression stress block
and is considered to resist a negative moment when it is located outside of
the bottom fiber compression stress block. The compression stress block
extends over a zone bounded by the edges of the cross-section and a straight
line located parallel to the neutral axis at the distance a = β 1 c from the ex-
treme compression fiber. The distance c is measured perpendicular to the
neutral axis.

For each tendon group, an area weighted average of the following values is
determined:

– = 0.153 ( 6 + 23
sum of the tendon areas, APTbottom = ) 4.437 in 2

Value reported by CSiBridge = 4.437 in2

– distance from the center of gravity of the tendons to the extreme com-
23 × 2 + 6 × 4
pression fiber, yPTbottom =
39 − =
36.586 in
23 + 6

Value reported by CSiBridge = 19.5 + 17.0862 = 36.586 in

– specified tensile strength of prestressing steel, f pu = 270 kip

Value reported by CSiBridge = 270 kip

– constant k (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-2)

 f py   243 
k= 2  1.04 − = 2  1.04 − = 0.28
 f pu   270 
Value reported by CSiBridge = 0.28

 The β 1 stress block factor is evaluated in accordance with AASHTO LRFD


5.7.2.2 based on section f ′c .

Flexure Design AASHTO LRFD 5 - 13


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

– If f ′c > 28 MPa, then

 f ′ − 28 
=β1 max  0.85 − c 0.05;0.65 
 7 
 34.473 − 28 
= max  0.85 − 0.05;0.65  =
0.80376
 7 
Value calculated by CSiBridge = 0.8037 (not reported)

 The distance c between the neutral axis and the compressive face is evalu-
ated in accordance with (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-4).

APT f pu
c=
f pu
0.85 f ′cβ1bslab + kAPT
y pt
4.437 × 270
= 6.91in
0.85 × 5 × 0.8037 × 48 + 0.28 × 4.437 36.586
270

Value calculated by CSiBridge = 6.919 in (not reported)

 The distance c is compared to the equivalent slab thickness to determine if


the section is a T-section or a rectangular section.

– If cβ1 > tslabeq → 6.91 × 0.80376


= 5.56 in > 5.5in , the section is a
T-section.
Value reported by CSiBridge, section = T-section

– If the section is a T-section, the distance c is recalculated in accordance


with (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-3).

APT f pu − 0.85 f ′c (bslab − bwebeq )tslabeq


=c =
f pu
0.85 f ′cβ1bwebeq + kAPT
y pt
4.437 × 270 − 0.85 × 5(48 − 10)5.5
= 7.149 in
0.85 × 5 × 0.8037 × 10 + 0.28 × 4.437 36.586
270

Value reported by CSiBridge = 7.1487 in

 Average stress in prestressing steel f ps is calculated in accordance with


(AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-1).

5 - 14 Flexure Design AASHTO LRFD


Chapter 5 - Design Concrete Box Girder Bridges

 c   7.149 
f ps = f pu  1 − k  =270  1 − 0.28  =255.23 ksi
 y pt   36.586 
Value reported by CSiBridge = 255.228 ksi

 Nominal flexural resistance M n is calculated in accordance with (AASHTO


LRFD 5.7.3.2.2-1).

– If the section is a T-section, then

 cβ   cβ tslabeq 
M n APT f ps  yPT − 1  + 0.85 f ′c ( bslab − bwebeq ) tslabeq  1 −
= 
 2   2 2 
 7.149 × 0.80376 
= 4.437 × 255.228 ×  36.586 − +
 2 
 7.149 × 0.80376 5.5 
0.85 × 5 ( 48 − 10 ) 5.5  − 
 2 2 
= 38287.42 kip-in
Value calculated by CSiBridge = 38287.721 kip-in (not reported)

Factored flexural resistance is obtained by multiplying M n by φ.

Mr = φM n = 1.0 × 38287.42 =
38287.42 kip-in
Value reported by CSiBridge = 38287.721 kip-in

5.3 Shear Design AASHTO LRFD

5.3.1 Capacity Parameters


PhiC – Resistance Factor; Default Value = 0.9, Typical value: 0.7 to 0.9. The
nominal shear capacity of normal weight concrete sections is multiplied by
the resistance factor to obtain factored resistance.

PhiC (Lightweight) – Resistance Factor for light-weight concrete; Default


Value = 0.7, Typical values: 0.7 to 0.9. The nominal shear capacity of light-
weight concrete sections is multiplied by the resistance factor to obtain fac-
tored resistance.

Shear Design AASHTO LRFD 5 - 15


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Include Resal (haunched girder) Shear Effect – Typical value: Yes. Specifies
whether the component of inclined flexural compression or tension, in the
direction of the applied shear, in variable depth members shall or shall not be
considered when determining the design factored shear force. Resal is con-
sidered only when the selected LRFD Method for shear design = Section 5.8.6
segmental box girder.

Type of shear rebar proportioning - Specify approach to proportioning of


transverse reinforcement per AASHTO LRFD Section C5.8.3.2. There are
two options: proportioning per Figure C5.8.3.2-1 (Default) and proportion-
ing per Figure C5.8.3.2-2.

LRFD Method for shear design - Specifies which method for shear design
will be used:
- Section 5.8.6 segmental box girder (default)
- Section 5.8.3.4.2 MCFT including torsion

The following design parameters are applicable only to the LRFD Method
for shear design = Section 5.8.3.4.2 MCFT including torsion:

Negative limit on strain in nonprestressed longitudinal reinforcement in ac-


cordance with AASHTO LRFD Section 5.8.3.4.2; Default Value = −0.4x10−3,
Typical value(s): 0 to −0.4x10−3.

Positive limit on strain in nonprestressed longitudinal reinforcement in ac-


cordance with AASHTO LRFD Section 5.8.3.4.2; Default Value = 6.0x10−3,
Typical value: 6.0x10−3.

PhiC for N u – Resistance Factor used in AASHTO LRFD Equation 5.8.3.5-1;


Default Value = 1.0, Typical values: 0.75 to 1.0.

Phif for M u – Resistance Factor used in AASHTO LRFD Equation 5.8.3.5-1;


Default Value = 0.9, Typical values: 0.9 to 1.0.

sx – Maximum distance between layers of longitudinal crack control rein-


forcement per AASHTO LRFD 5.8.3.4.2-5.

ag – Maximum aggregate size, Eq 5.8.3.4.2. This parameter is used only when


min transverse reinforcement is not provided.

5 - 16 Shear Design AASHTO LRFD


Chapter 5 - Design Concrete Box Girder Bridges

Method for determining sign of MuMin - Specify option of how to deter-


mine sign of MuMin=(Vu-Vp)*dv when demand Mu<(Vu-Vp)*dv (Eq.
5.8.3.4.2-4). There are four options: 1:Automatic by CSiBridge; 2:Sign of
MuMin equal to Mu; 3:Add two MuMin - one positive, one negative; and
4:do not generate MuMin, use Mu.

5.3.2 Shear design per LRFD Section 5.8.6 Segmental Box Girder
5.3.2.1 Variables
A Gross area of the section

AO Area enclosed by the shear flow path, including the area of holes, if any

Al Area of longitudinal torsion reinforcement

A vsweb Area of shear reinforcement in web per unit length

A vtweb Area of transverse torsion reinforcement in web per unit length

b Minimum horizontal gross width of the web (not adjusted for ducts)

bv Minimum effective horizontal width of the web adjusted for the


presence of ducts

be Minimum effective normal width of the shear flow path adjusted to


account for the presence of ducts

dv Effective vertical height of the section = max(0.8×h, distance from the


extreme compression fiber to the center of gravity of the tensile PT)

CG top , CG bot Distance from the center of gravity of the section to the top and
bottom fiber

h Vertical height of the section

ph Perimeter of the polygon defined by the centroids of the longitudi-


nal chords of the space truss resisting torsion

Shear Design AASHTO LRFD 5 - 17


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Pu ,Vu 2 , M u 3 , Tu Factored demand forces and moments per section

t Minimum normal gross width of the web (not adjusted for ducts) =
b cos ( α web )

tv Minimum effective normal width of the web = bv cos (α web )

α web Web angle of inclination from the vertical

φ Resistance factor for shear

κ web Distribution factor for the web

λ Normal or light-weight concrete factor

5.3.2.2 Design Process


With respect to shear and torsion check, in accordance with AASHTO Article
5.8.6, torsion is considered.

The shear resistance is determined in accordance with AASHTO LRFD Par-


agraph 5.8.6 (Shear and Torsion for Segmental Box Girder Bridges). The pro-
cedure is not applicable to discontinuity regions and applies only to sections
where it is reasonable to assume that plane sections remain plane after load-
ing. The user should select for design only those sections that comply with
the preceding assumptions by defining appropriate station ranges in the
Bridge Design Request (see Chapter 4).

If the option to consider real effects is activated, the component of the in-
clined flexural compression or tension in the direction of the demand shear
in variable depth members is considered when determining the design sec-
tion shear force (AASHTO LRFD Paragraph 5.8.6.1).

The section design shear force is distributed into individual webs assuming
that the vertical shear that is carried by a web decreases with increased incli-
nation of the web from vertical. Section torsion moments are assigned to ex-
ternal webs and slabs.

5 - 18 Shear Design AASHTO LRFD


Chapter 5 - Design Concrete Box Girder Bridges

The rebar area and ratio are calculated using measurements normal to the
web. Thus, vertical shear forces are divided by cos(alpha_web). The rebar
area calculated is the actual, normal cross-section of the bars. The rebar ratio
is calculated using the normal width of the web, t web = b web × cos(alpha_web).

The effects of ducts in members are considered in accordance with paragraph


5.8.6.1 of the code. In determining the web or flange effective thickness, b e ,
one-half of the diameter of the ducts is subtracted. All defined tendons in a
section, stressed or not, are assumed to be grouted. Each tendon at a section
is checked for presence in the web or flange, and the minimum controlling
effective web and flange thicknesses are evaluated.

The tendon duct is considered as having effect on the web or flange effective
thickness even if only part of the duct is within the element boundaries. In
such cases, the entire one-half of the tendon duct diameter is subtracted from
the element thickness.

If several tendon ducts overlap in one flange or web (when projected on the
horizontal axis for flange, or when projected on vertical axis for the web), the
diameters of ducts are added for the sake of evaluation of the effective thick-
ness. In the web, the effective web thickness is calculated at the top and bot-
tom of each duct; in the flange, the effective thickness is evaluated at the left
and right sides of the duct.

The Shear and Torsion Design is completed first on a per web basis. Rebar
needed for individual webs is then summed and reported for the entire sec-
tion. The D/C ratio is calculated for each web. Then the shear area of all webs
is summed and the entire section D/C is calculated. Therefore, the controlling
section D/C does not necessarily match the controlling web D/C (in
other words, other webs can make up the capacity for a “weak” web).

5.3.2.3 Algorithm
 All section properties and demands are converted from CSiBridge model
units to N, mm.

 If the option to consider resal effects is activated, the component of the


inclined flexural compression or tension in the direction of the demand
shear in variable depth members is evaluated as follows:

Shear Design AASHTO LRFD 5 - 19


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

– Inclination angles of the top and bottom slabs are determined

 yslab top2 − yslab top1 


αslab top =
arctan  
 Stat2 − Stat1 
 yslab bot2 − yslab bot1 
αslab bot =
arctan  
 Stat2 − Stat1 

where

yslab top2 , yslab top1  vertical coordinate of the center of gravity of the
top slab at stations 1 and 2. The y origin is assumed to be at the
top of the section and the + direction is up.

Stat1 , Stat2  stations of adjacent sections. When the section being


analyzed is “Before,” the current section station is Stat 2 ; when
the section being analyzed is “After,” the current section sta-
tion is Stat 1 . Therefore, the statement Stat1 < Stat2 is always
valid.

 The magnitudes of normal forces in slabs are determined as follows:

P M 
=
Pslab top Aslab top  u − u 3 dslab top 
 A I3 

P M 
=
Pslab bot Aslab bot  u + u 3 dslab bot 
 A I3 

where dslab top , dslab bot are distances from the center of gravity of the
section to the center of gravity of the slab (positive).

 The magnitudes of vertical components of slab normal forces are deter-


mined as follows:

Presal top = Pslab top tan α slab top

Presal bot = Pslab bot tan α slab bot

5 - 20 Shear Design AASHTO LRFD


Chapter 5 - Design Concrete Box Girder Bridges

 On the basis of the location and inclination of each web, the per-web de-
mand values are evaluated.

Outer Web Inner Web


Location V uweb T uweb V uweb T uweb

Shear abs(Vu 2 + Presal top + Presal bot ) × κ abs(Vu 2 + Presal top + Presal bot ) × κ
and cosα web Abs(T u cosα web 0
Torsion )
Check

cos ( | α web |)
where κ web =
∑ cos ( | α web |)
nweb
1

 Evaluate effective thicknesses:


Evaluate d v b v b e t v

– If b v ≤ 0, then

D
= 2,= 0; Avs=
WebPassFlag web 0; Avt=
web 0; Avs=
flag 2; Avt=
flag 2
C
proceed to report web results

– If b e < 0, then SectionPassFlag = 2.

 Evaluate design f ′c :

f ′c min( f ′c , 8.3 MPa)

 Evaluate the stress variable K:

– Calculate the extreme fiber stress:

CGtop σtens= max ( σtop , σbot )


P M3 P M3
σbot = + CGbot σ top = −
A I 33 A I 33

|P|
– If σ tens > 0.5 f ′c , then K = 1; else K
= 1+ A ,
0.166 × f ′c

Shear Design AASHTO LRFD 5 - 21


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

where K < 2.

 Evaluate V c per web (shear capacity of concrete):

Vcweb 0.1663K λ f ′c bv dv .
= (AASHTO LRFD 5.8.6.5-3)

 Evaluate V s per web (shear force that is left to be carried by rebar):

Vuweb − φVcweb
Vsweb = .
φ

– If Vsweb < 0, then Avsweb = 0;

Vsweb
else Avsweb = .
f y dv

 Verify the minimum reinforcement requirement:

– If Avsweb < 0.35t f y (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.2.5-2), then

Avsweb = 0.35t f y and Aswebflag = 0;

else Avswebflag = 1.

 Evaluate the nominal capacities:

Vsweb = Avsweb f y dv

V=
nweb Vcweb + Vsweb

 Evaluate the shear D/C for the web:

Vuweb
D φ
  = .
 C  sweb bv dv f ′c

 Evaluate T cr (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.6.3-2):

Tcr = 0.166 K f ′c 2 A0 be .

5 - 22 Shear Design AASHTO LRFD


Chapter 5 - Design Concrete Box Girder Bridges

 Evaluate torsion rebar:

1
– If Tuweb < φTcr , then:
3

Avtflag = 0

Avtweb = 0

Al = 0

Torsion Effects Flag = 0;

else:

Avtflag = 1

Tuweb
Avtweb =
φA0 2 f y

Tuweb ph
Al =
φA0 2 f ylong

Torsion Effects Flag = 1.

 Evaluate the combined shear and torsion D/C for the web:

Vuweb T
+ uweb
D φb d φ2 A0 be
  = v v .
 C tweb 1.25 f ′c

 Evaluate the controlling D/C for the web:

D D
– If   >   , then Ratio Flag = 0;
 C  sweb  C tweb

else

Ratio Flag = 1

Shear Design AASHTO LRFD 5 - 23


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

D  D  D 
= max    ,    .
C   C sweb  C tweb 

D
– If > 1, then Web Pass Flag = 1;
C

else

Web Pass Flag = 0.

 Assign web rebar flags where the rebar flag convention is:

Flag = 0 – rebar governed by minimum code requirement


Flag = 1 – rebar governed by demand
Flag = 2 – rebar not calculated since the web b v < 0
Flag = 3 – rebar not calculated since the web is not part of the shear flow
path for torsion

 Evaluate entire section values:

Vcsection = ∑V cweb

Vssection = ∑V sweb

Vnsection = ∑V nweb

Avssection =∑A vsweb

Avtsection =∑A vtweb

Alsection = Al

 Evaluate entire section D/C:


nweb Vuweb
tv
1 φbv dv

nweb
D tv
  = 1
.
 C ssection f ′c

5 - 24 Shear Design AASHTO LRFD


Chapter 5 - Design Concrete Box Girder Bridges

This is equivalent to:


| Vu |

nweb
D φ t v dv
  = 1
 C  s sec tion f ′c

and

| Vu | | Tu |
+
∑ φ2 A0 be
nweb
D φ t v dv
  = 1
.
 C tsection 1.25 f ′c

 Evaluate controlling D/C for section:

D D
– If   >  , then Ratio Flag = 0 else Ratio Flag = 1
 C  ssection  C tsection

D  D  D 
= max    ,  .
C   C  ssection  C tsection 

D
– If > 1, then Section Pass Flag = 1;
C
else
Section Pass Flag = 0.

 Assign section design flags where flag convention is:


Flag = 0 – Section Passed all code checks
Flag = 1 – Section D/C > 1
Flag = 2 – Section b e < 0 (section invalid)

5.3.2.4 Shear Design Example


Cross Section: AASHTO Box Beam, Type BIII-48, as shown in Figure 5-5.

Shear Design AASHTO LRFD 5 - 25


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Figure 5-5 Shear Design Example, AASHTO Box Beam, Type BIII-48

φ = 0.9
Concrete unit weight, w c = 0.150 kcf
λ = 1.0
Concrete strength at 28 days, f ′c = 5.0 ksi (~34.473 MPa)
Design span = 95.0 ft
Prestressing strands: ½ in. dia., seven wire, low relaxation
Area of one strand = 0.153 in2
Ultimate strength fpu = 270.0 ksi
Yield strength fpy = 0.9
fpu = 243 ksi
Modulus of elasticity, Ep = 28500 ksi

Reinforcing bars: yield strength, fy = 60.0 ksi (~413.68 MPa)


Section Properties
A = area of cross-section of beam = 826 in2 (~532902 mm2)
h = overall depth of precast beam = 39 in (~990.6 mm)
I = moment of inertia about
centroid of the beam = 170812 in4 (~71097322269 mm4)
yb,yt = distance from centroid to the
extreme bottom (top) fiber of

5 - 26 Shear Design AASHTO LRFD


Chapter 5 - Design Concrete Box Girder Bridges

the beam = 19.5 in (~495.3


mm)
Aslabtop = Aslabbot = 48×5.5 = 264 in2 (~170322 mm2)
Ao = (48 − 5) × (39 − 5.5) = 1440.5 in2 (~929353 mm2)
Ph = 2 × (48 − 5 + 39 − 5.5) = 153 in (~3886.2 mm)

Demand forces from Dead and PT (COMB1) at station 114 before:


P = −800 kip (~ −3560 E+03 N)
M3 = −7541 kip-in (~ −852 E+06 Nmm)
V2 = −33 kip (~ −148.3 E+03 N)
T = 4560 kip-in (515.2 E+06 Nmm)

Figure 5-6 Shear Design Example Reinforcement


AASHTO Box Beam, Type BIII-48

 All section properties and demands are converted from CSiBridge model
units to N, mm.

 On the basis of the location and inclination of each web, the per-web de-
mand values are evaluated.

Outer Web Inner Web


Location Vuweb Tuweb Vuweb Tuweb

Shear Design AASHTO LRFD 5 - 27


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Shear and abs(Vu 2 + Presal top + Presal bot ) × κ


=
Torsion cos α web 0
Check Abs(Tu)=515.2E+06 N/A
abs(148.3E + 03 + 0 + 0) × 1 N/A
= 74151.9 N
cos0

cos ( | α web |) cos ( | 0 |)


where
= κ web = = 0.5
∑ (| α web |) ∑ cos ( | 0 |)
nweb 2
1
cos 1

Evaluate the effective shear flow path thicknesses:

be = min(tfirstweb , t lastweb , t topslabv , t botslabv )


= min(127,127,139.7,139.7)
= 127mm

Evaluate the effective web width and normal thickness:

Since the web is vertical, bv = tv = 127 mm.

Evaluate the effective depth:

Since M3 < 0 then

=dv max(0.8h, ybot + yPTtop )


= max(0.8 × 990.6,495.3 + 419.1) = 914.4mm

Evaluate design f ′c :

=f ′c min
= f ′c ,8.3MPa min (= (
34.473,8.3MPa ) 5.871 )
Evaluate stress variable K:

Calculate the extreme fiber stress

P M3 −3560E + 03 −852 E + 06
σbot = + CGbot = + 495.3 =−12.616 MPa.
A I 33 532902 71097322269
P M3 −3560E + 03 −852 E + 06
σtop = − CGtop = − 495.3 =−0.745MPa
A I 33 532902 71097322269
σtens =
max(σtop , σbot ) =
max(−12.61, −0.745) =
−0.745MPa

5 - 28 Shear Design AASHTO LRFD


Chapter 5 - Design Concrete Box Girder Bridges

If σ tens > 0.5 f ′c , then K = 1→ false;

|P| | −3560E + 03 |
else K =
1+ A =
1+ 532902 =
2.8
0.166 × f ′c 0.166 × 5.871

where K < 2; therefore K = 2.

Evaluate Vc per web (shear capacity of concrete; AASHTO LRFD 5.8.6.5-3):

V=
cweb 0.1663K λ f ′c b=
v dv 0.1663 × 2 × 1.0 × 5.871 × 127 × 914.4
= 226781N.

Evaluate Vs per web (shear force that is left to be carried by the rebar):

Vuweb − φVcweb 74151.9 − 0.9 × 226781


Vsweb = = = −144392 N.
φ 0.9

If Vsweb < 0, then Avsweb = 0 → true;

Vsweb
else Avsweb = .
f y dv

Verify minimum reinforcement requirement:

– If Avsweb < 0.35t f y (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.2.5-2), then → true

0.35 × 127
= =
Avsweb 0.35t fy = 0.10745mm 2 / mm and Aswebflag = 0;
413.68

else Avswebflag = 1.

Evaluate the nominal capacities:

Vsweb= Avsweb f y dv= 0.10745 × 413.68 × 914.4= 40645N


Vn web = Vcweb + Vsweb = 226781 + 40645 = 267426 N

Shear Design AASHTO LRFD 5 - 29


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Evaluate the shear D/C for the web:

Vuweb 74151.9
D φ 0.9= 0.1208
=
  =
 C  sweb bv dv f ′c 127 × 914.4 × 5.871

Evaluate Tcr (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.6.3-2):

T=
cr 0.166 K f ′c 2 A0=
be 0.166 × 2 × 5.871 × 2 × 929353 × 127
= 460 147 419 Nmm

Evaluate the torsion rebar:

1 1
– If Tuweb < φTcr =
> 515.2E6 < 0.9 × 460E6 → false, then:
3 3

Avtflag = 1

Tuweb 515.2E6
=
Avtweb = = 0.7444mm 2 / mm
φA0 2 f y 0.9 × 929352 × 2 × 413.68

Tuweb ph 515.2E6 × 3886.2


=Al = = 2893mm 2
φA0 2 f ylong 0.9 × 929352 × 2 × 413.68

Torsion Effects Flag = 1.

Evaluate the combined shear and torsion D/C for the web:

Vuweb T 74151.9 515.2E6


+ uweb +
D φbv dv φ2 A0 be 0.9 × 127 × 914.4 0.9 × 2 × 929352 × 127
=
  =
 C tweb 1.25 f ′c 1.25 × 5.871
= 0.427.

Evaluate the controlling D/C for the web:

D D
– If   >   , then Ratio Flag = 0 → false;
 C  sweb  C tweb

else

5 - 30 Shear Design AASHTO LRFD


Chapter 5 - Design Concrete Box Girder Bridges

Ratio Flag =1 → true

D  D  D 
= max  =
  ,    max ( 0.1208, 0.427 ) 0.427.
=
C   C  sweb  C tweb 

D
– If > 1, then Web Pass Flag =1 → true;
C

else

Web Pass Flag = 0.

Assign web rebar flags where rebar flag convention is:

Flag = 0 – rebar governed by minimum code requirement


Flag = 1 – rebar governed by demand => true
Flag = 2 – rebar not calculated since web bv< 0
Flag = 3 – rebar not calculated since the web is not part of the shear
flow path for torsion.

Evaluate the entire section values:

Vcsection = ∑
Vcweb =
2 × 226 781 =
453562 N
Vssection ∑V =
= 2 × 40645 =
sweb 81290 N
Vnsection ∑V =
= 2 × 267 426 =
nweb 534852 N
Avssection ∑A =
= 2 × 0.10 745 =
vsweb 0.2149 mm / mm 2

Avtsection ∑A =
= 2 × 0.7444887 =
vtweb 1.48898mm / mm 2

Alsection= A=
l 2893mm 2

Evaluate entire section D/C:


nweb Vuweb
tv
1 φbv dv

nweb
D tv
  = 1
. This is equivalent to:
 C ssection f ′c

Shear Design AASHTO LRFD 5 - 31


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

| Vu | 148.3E3
∑ ∑=
nweb 2
D φ 1 t v dv 0.9 127 × 914.4
=
  = 1
0.1208
 C  ssection f ′c 5.871

and

| Vu | | Tu |
+
∑ φ2 A0 be
nweb
D φ t v dv
  = 1
 C tsection 1.25 f ′c
515.2E6 148.3E3
+
0.9 1 127 × 914.4 0.9 × 2 × 929352 × 127 ∑
2

= = 0.427.
1.25 × 5.871

Evaluate the controlling D/C for the section:

D D
– If   >  , then Ratio Flag = 0 → false;
 C  ssection  C tsection

else Ratio Flag = 1 →true

D  D  D 
= max   = ,  =
 max ( 0.1208,0.427 ) 0.427.
C   C  ssection  C tsection 

D
– If > 1, then SectionPassFlag = 1 → true;
C

else

Section Pass Flag = 0.

Assign the section design flags where the flag convention is:

Flag = 0 – Section Passed all code checks → true

Flag = 1 – Section D/C >1

Flag = 2 – Section be < 0 (section invalid)

5 - 32 Shear Design AASHTO LRFD


Chapter 5 - Design Concrete Box Girder Bridges

5.3.3 Shear design per LRFD Section 5.8.3.4.2 MCFT Including Tor-
sion
5.3.3.1 Shear Design

For shear design refer to Chapter 6 section 6.2 of this manual.

5.3.3.2 Torsion Design


First the program determines if the torsional effects shall be considered per
5.8.2.1-3.

𝐴𝐴2𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑓𝑓𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝑇𝑇𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = 0.125�𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ �1 +
𝑝𝑝𝑐𝑐 0.125�𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′

If 𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢 > 0.25𝜑𝜑𝑇𝑇𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 then the required total area of transverse torsion reinforce-
ment in the exterior web per unit length is determined per LRFD eq 5.8.3.6.2-
1 as:

𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢
=
𝑠𝑠 𝜑𝜑𝐴𝐴𝑜𝑜 𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦 cot 𝜃𝜃

And the longitudinal reinforcement for torsion per LRFD eq. 5.8.3.6.3-2 as:

𝑇𝑇𝑢𝑢 𝑝𝑝ℎ
𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 =
𝜑𝜑𝐴𝐴0 𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦

5.4 Principal Stress Design, AASHTO LRFD

5.4.1 Capacity Parameters


PhiC – Resistance Factor; Default Value = 1.0, Typical value: 1.0.
The compression and tension limits are multiplied by the φC factor.

Principal Stress Design, AASHTO LRFD 5 - 33


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

FactorCompLim – f ′c multiplier; Default Value = 0.4; Typical values: 0.4 to


0.6. The f ′c is multiplied by the FactorCompLim to obtain the compression
limit.

FactorTensLim – f ′c multiplier; Default Values = 0.19 (ksi), 0.5(MPa);


Typical values: 0 to 0.24 (ksi), 0 to 0.63 (MPa). The f ′c is multiplied by
the FactorTensLim to obtain tension limit.

5.4.2 Demand Parameters


FactorCompLim – Percentage of the basic unit stress for compression ser-
vice design; Default value = 1.0; Typical values 1.0 to 1.5. The demand com-
pressive stresses are divided by the FactorCompLim factor. This way the
controlling stress can be selected and compared against one compression
limit.

FactorTensLim – Percentage of the basic unit stress for tension service de-
sign; Default value = 1.0; Typical values 1.0 to 1.5. The demand tensile
stresses are divided by the FactorCompLim factor. This way the controlling
stress can be selected and compared against one tension limit.

5.4.3 Algorithm
The stresses are evaluated at three points along the web – at the bottom of
the web (where the web enters the bottom slab), at the top of the web (where
the web enters the top slab), and at the neutral axis of the section. The stresses
assume a linear distribution and take into account axial (P), both bending
moments (M2 and M3), vertical shear (V2), and torsion. The shear and tor-
sion are distributed into individual webs in the same manner as described in
5.3.2.3.

The stresses are evaluated for each demand set. If the demand set contains
live load, CSiBridge positions the load to capture extreme stress at each of the
evaluation points.

Extremes are found for each point and the controlling demand set name is
recorded.

5 - 34 Principal Stress Design, AASHTO LRFD


Chapter 5 - Design Concrete Box Girder Bridges

The stress limits are evaluated by applying the Capacity Parameters.

Principal Stress Design, AASHTO LRFD 5 - 35


Chapter 6
Design Multi-Cell Concrete Box Bridges using AMA

This chapter describes the algorithms used by CSiBridge for design checks when
the superstructure has a deck that includes cast-in-place multi-cell concrete box
design and uses the Approximate Method of Analysis, as described in the
AASHTO LRFD 2014 (AASHTO LRFD) code.

When interim revisions of the codes are published by the relevant authorities,
and (when applicable) they are subsequently incorporated into CSiBridge, the
program gives the user an option to select what type of interims shall be used for
the design. The interims can be selected by clicking on the Code Preferences
button.

For MulticellConcBox design in CSiBridge, each web and its tributary slabs are
designed separately. Moments and shears due to live load are distributed to in-
dividual webs in accordance with the factors specified in AASHTO LRFD Arti-
cles 4.6.2.2.2 and 4.6.2.2.3 of the code. To control if the section is designed as
“a whole-width structure” in accordance with AASHTO LRFD Article 4.6.2.2.1
of the code, select “Yes” for the “Diaphragms Present” option. When CSiBridge
calculates the Live Load Distribution (LLD) factors, the section and span quali-
fication criteria stated in AASHTO LRFD 4.6.2.2 are verified and non-compliant
sections are not designed.

Stress Design 6-1


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

When determining the D over C ratio per AASHTO LRFD Article 5.8.3.4.2, the
Shear design request ignores torsion.

The user has an option to select “No Interims” or “YYYY Interims” on the
Bridge Design Preferences form. The form can be opened by clicking the Code
Preferences button.

The revisions published in the 2015 interims were incorporated into the Flexure
Design.

6.1 Stress Design


The following parameters are considered during stress design:

PhiC – Resistance Factor; Default Value = 1.0, Typical value: 1.0. The compres-
sion and tension limits are multiplied by the φ C factor.

FactorCompLim – f ′c multiplier; Default Value = 0.4; Typical values: 0.4 to


0.6. The f ′c is multiplied by the FactorCompLim to obtain compression limit.

FactorTensLim – f 'c multiplier; Default Value = 0.19 (ksi), 0.5(MPa); Typi-


cal values: 0 to 0.24 (ksi), 0 to 0.63 (MPa). The f 'c is multiplied by the Fac-
torTensLim to obtain tension limit.

The stresses are evaluated at three points at the top fiber of the top slab and three
points at the bottom fiber of the bottom slab: the left corner, the centerline web
and the right corner of the relevant slab tributary area. The location is labeled in
the output plots and tables. See Chapter 9, Section 9.1.1.

Concrete strength f ′c is read at every point, and compression and tension limits
are evaluated using the FactorCompLim - f ′c multiplier and FactorTensLim -
f 'c multiplier.

The stresses assume linear distribution and take into account axial (P) and either
both bending moments (M2 and M3) or only P and M3, depending on which
method for determining LLD factors have been specified in the Design Request
(see Chapters 3 and 4).

6-2 Stress Design


Chapter 6 - Design Multi-Cell Concrete Box Bridges using AMA

The stresses are evaluated for each demand set (Chapter 4). Extremes are found
for each point and the controlling demand set name is recorded.

The stress limits are evaluated by applying the preceding parameters.

6.2 Shear Design


The following parameters are considered during shear design:

PhiC – Resistance Factor; Default Value = 0.9, Typical values: 0.7 to 0.9. The
nominal shear capacity of normal weight concrete sections is multiplied by the
resistance factor to obtain factored resistance.

PhiC (Lightweight) – Resistance Factor for light-weight concrete; Default Value


= 0.7, Typical values: 0.7 to 0.9. The nominal shear capacity of light-weight
concrete sections is multiplied by the resistance factor to obtain factored re-
sistance.

Check Sub Type – Typical value: MCFT. Specifies which method for shear de-
sign will be used: either Modified Compression Field Theory (MCFT) in ac-
cordance with AASHTO LRFD Section 5.8.3.4.2; or the Vci/Vcw method in
accordance with AASHTO LRFD Section 5.8.3.4.3. Currently only the MCFT
option is available.

Negative limit on strain in nonprestressed longitudinal reinforcement in accord-


ance with AASHTO LRFD Section 5.8.3.4.2; Default Value = −0.4x10−3, Typi-
cal value(s): 0 to −0.4x10−3.

Positive limit on strain in nonprestressed longitudinal reinforcement in accord-


ance with AASHTO LRFD Section 5.8.3.4.2; Default Value = 6.0x10−3, Typical
value: 6.0x10−3.

PhiC for N u – Resistance Factor used in AASHTO LRFD Equation 5.8.3.5-1;


Default Value = 1.0, Typical values: 0.75 to 1.0.

Phif for M u – Resistance Factor used in AASHTO LRFD Equation 5.8.3.5-1;


Default Value = 0.9, Typical values: 0.9 to 1.0.

sx – Maximum distance between layers of longitudinal crack control reinforce-


ment per AASHTO LRFD 5.8.3.4.2-5.

Shear Design 6-3


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

ag – Maximum aggregate size, Eq 5.8.3.4.2. This parameter is used only when


min transverse reinforcement is not provided.

Type of shear rebar proportioning - Specify approach to proportioning of trans-


verse reinforcement per AASHTO LRFD Section C5.8.3.2. There are two op-
tions: proportioning per Figure C5.8.3.2-1 (Default) and proportioning per Fig-
ure C5.8.3.2-2.

Method for determining sign of MuMin - Specify option of how to determine


sign of MuMin=(Vu-Vp)*dv when demand Mu<(Vu-Vp)*dv (Eq. 5.8.3.4.2-4).
There are four options: 1:Automatic by CSiBridge; 2:Sign of MuMin equal to
Mu; 3:Add two MuMin - one positive, one negative; and 4:do not generate
MuMin, use Mu.

6.2.1 Variables
Ac Area of concrete on the flexural tension side of the member

Aps Area of prestressing steel on the flexural tension side of the member

Avl Area of nonprestressed steel on the flexural tension side of the member
at the section under consideration

AVS Area of transverse shear reinforcement per unit length

AVS min Minimum area of transverse shear reinforcement per unit length in
accordance with AASHTO LRFD Equation 5.8.2.5

a Depth of equivalent stress block in accordance with AASHTO LRFD


Section 5.7.3.2.2. Varies for positive and negative moment.

b Minimum web width

bv Effective web width adjusted for presence of prestressing ducts in


accordance with AASHTO LRFD Section 5.8.2.9

dgirder Depth of the girder

6-4 Shear Design


Chapter 6 - Design Multi-Cell Concrete Box Bridges using AMA

dPTbot Distance from the top of the top slab to the center of gravity of the
tendons in the bottom of the precast beam

dv Effective shear depth in accordance with AASHTO LRFD 5.8.2.9

Ec Young’s modulus of concrete

Ep Prestressing steel Young’s modulus

Es Reinforcement Young’s modulus

f pu Specified tensile strength of the prestressing steel

Mu Factored moment at the section

Nu Applied factored axial force, taken as positive if tensile

Vp Component in the direction of the applied shear of the effective pre-


stressing force; if Vp has the same sign as Vu, the component is resist-
ing the applied shear.

Vu Factored shear demand per girder excluding force in tendons

V2 c Shear in the Section Cut excluding the force in tendons

V2Tot Shear in the Section Cut including the force in tendons

εs Strain in nonprestressed longitudinal tension reinforcement


(AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.4.2-4)

ε sLimitPos , ε sLimitNeg = Max and min value of strain in nonprestressed longitudinal


tension reinforcement as specified in the Design Request

ϕV Resistance factor for shear

ϕP Resistance factor for axial load

ϕF Resistance factor for moment

Shear Design 6-5


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

6.2.2 Design Process


The shear resistance is determined in accordance with AASHTO LRFD para-
graph 5.8.3.4.2 (derived from Modified Compression Field Theory). The proce-
dure assumes that the concrete shear stresses are distributed uniformly over an
area b v wide and d v deep, that the direction of principal compressive stresses
(defined by angle θ and shown as D) remains constant over d v , and that the shear
strength of the section can be determined by considering the biaxial stress con-
ditions at just one location in the web. For design, the user should select only
those sections that comply with these assumptions by defining appropriate sta-
tion ranges in the Design Request (see Chapter 4).

The effective web width is taken as the minimum web width, measured parallel
to the neutral axis, between the resultants of the tensile and compressive forces
as a result of flexure. In determining the effective web width at a particular level,
one-quarter the diameter of grouted ducts at that level is subtracted from the web
width.

All defined tendons in a section, stressed or not, are assumed to be grouted. Each
tendon at a section is checked for presence in the web, and the minimum con-
trolling effective web thicknesses are evaluated.

The tendon duct is considered to have an effect on the web effective thickness
even if only part of the duct is within the web boundaries. In such cases, the
entire one-quarter of the tendon duct diameter is subtracted from the element
thickness.

If several tendon ducts overlap in one web (when projected on the vertical axis),
the diameters of the ducts are added for the sake of evaluation of the effective
thickness. The effective web thickness is calculated at the top and bottom of each
duct.

Shear design is completed on a per-web basis. Please refer to Chapter 3 for a


description of the live load distribution to individual girders.

6.2.3 Algorithms
All section properties and demands are converted from CSiBridge model units
to N, mm.

6-6 Shear Design


Chapter 6 - Design Multi-Cell Concrete Box Bridges using AMA

For every COMBO specified in the Design Request that contains envelopes, a
new force demand set is generated. The new force demand set is built up from
the maximum tension values of P and the maximum absolute values of V2 and
M3 of the two StepTypes (Max and Min) present in the envelope COMBO case.
The StepType of this new force demand set is named ABS and the signs of the
P, V2 and M3 are preserved. The ABS case follows the industry practice where
sections are designed for extreme shear and moments that are not necessarily
corresponding to the same design vehicle position. The section cut is designed
for all three StepTypes in the COMBOMax, Min and ABSand the control-
ling StepType is reported.

In cases where the demand moment Mu < Vu − Vp × dv , two new force demand sets
= Vu − Vp dvpos and Muneg
are generated where Mupos = Vu − Vp dvneg . The acronyms
“-CodeMinMuPos” and “-CodeMinMuNeg” are added to the end of the
StepType name. The signs of the P and V2 are preserved.

The component in the direction of the applied shear of the effective prestressing
force, positive if resisting the applied shear, is evaluated:

V2 c − V2Tot
Vp =
ngirders

The depth of the equivalent stress block ‘a’ for both positive and negative mo-
ment is evaluated in accordance with AASHTO LRFD Equation 5.7.3.1.1.

Effective shear depth is evaluated.

=
If M u > 0, then dv max ( 0.72 × dgirder , 0.9 × dPTbot , dPTbot − 0.5 × a ) .

If M u < 0, then

=dv max 0.72 × dgirder ,0.9 × (dgirder − 0.5 × dcompslab ),(dgirder − 0.5 × dcompslab ) − 0.5 × a  .

The demand/capacity ratio (D/C) is calculated based on the maximum permissi-


ble shear capacity at a section in accordance with AASHTO LRFD Section
5.8.3.2-2.

Shear Design 6-7


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Vu
− Vp
D φV
= (AASHTO LRFD 5.8.3.2-2)
C 0.25 × f 'c × b × dv

Evaluate the numerator and denominator of (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.4.2-4).

Mu
ε snumerator = + 0.5 × N u + Vu − Vp − Aps × 0.7 × f pu
dV

ε sdenominator = E p × Aps + Es × Avl

Adjust denominator values as follows.

If ε sdenominator = 0 and ε snumerator > 0, then ε s = ε sLimitPos and

ε snumerator
− E p × Aps
εs
Avl = .
Es

If ε snumerator <0, then ε sdenominator = E p × Aps + Es × Avl + Ec × Ac

Evaluate (eq. 5.8.3.4.2-4).

ε
ε s = snumerator
ε sdenominator

Check if axial tension is large enough to crack the flexural compression face of
the section.

Nu
If > 0.52 × f 'c , then ε s = 2 × ε s .
Agirder

Check against the limit on the strain in nonprestressed longitudinal tension rein-
forcement specified in the Design Request, and if necessary, recalculate how
much longitudinal rebar is needed to reach the EpsSpos tension limit.

=
ε s max(ε s , ε sLimitNeg ) and ε=
s min(ε s , ε sLimitPos )

6-8 Shear Design


Chapter 6 - Design Multi-Cell Concrete Box Bridges using AMA

Evaluate the angle θ of inclination of diagonal compressive stresses as deter-


mined in AASHTO LRFD Article 5.8.3.4.

18 ≤ 29 + 3500 × ε s ≤ 45 (AASHTO LRFD 5.8.3.4)

Evaluate the factor indicating the ability of diagonally cracked concrete to trans-
mit tension and shear, as specified in AASHTO LRFD Article 5.8.3.4.

4.8
β= (AASHTO LRFD 5.8.3.4)
1 + 750 × ε s

Evaluate the nominal shear resistance provided by tensile stresses in the concrete
(AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.3-3).

=
Vc 0.083 × β × λ × f 'c × b × d v

Evaluate how much shear demand is left to be carried by rebar.

Vu
VS = − Vp − Vc
ϕs

Vs
If VS < 0 , then AVS = 0; else AVS = .
1
f y × dv ×
tanθ
(AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.3-4)

Check against minimum transverse shear reinforcement.

0.083 × λ f 'c × b
If Vu > 0.5 × φs × Vc + Vp , then AVSmin = in accord-
fy
ance with (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.2.5-1); else AVS min = 0.

If VS < 0, then AVS = AVSmin ; else AVS = max( AVSmin , AVS ).

Recalculate V s in accordance with (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.3-4).

1
VS = AVS × f y × dv × .
tanθ

Shear Design 6-9


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Evaluate the longitudinal rebar on the flexure tension side in accordance with
(AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.5-1).

 VU  Vu  
 − VP − 0.5 × min  VS ,  
 φS  φ 
− E p × Aps  ×
MU NU 1
A=  d × φ + 0.5 × φ + tanθ
SLreq
 v f P  fy
AVL = max( AVL , ASLreq )

Assign longitudinal rebar to the top or bottom side of the girder based on the
moment sign.

If MU < 0, then AVLCompSlabU = AVL and AVLBeamBotFlange = 0,

else AVLCompSlabU = 0 and AVLBeamBotFlange = AVL .

6.3 Flexure Design


The following parameter is used in the design of flexure:

PhiC – Resistance Factor; Default Value = 1.0, Typical value(s): 1.0. The nom-
inal flexural capacity is multiplied by the resistance factor to obtain factored re-
sistance

6.3.1 Variables
A PS Area of the PT in the tension zone

AS Area of reinforcement in the tension zone

Aslab Tributary area of the slab

a Depth of the equivalent stress block in accordance with AASHTO


LRFD 5.7.3.2.2

bslab Effective flange width = horizontal width of the slab tributary area,
measured from out to out

bwebeq Thickness of the beam web

6 - 10 Flexure Design
Chapter 6 - Design Multi-Cell Concrete Box Bridges using AMA

dP Distance from the extreme compression fiber to the centroid of the


prestressing tendons in the tension zone

dS Distance from the extreme compression fiber to the centroid of the


rebar in the tension zone

f ps Average stress in prestressing steel (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-1)

f pu Specified tensile strength of prestressing steel (area weighted aver-


age of all tendons in the tensile zone)

f py Yield tensile strength of prestressing steel (area weighted average of


all tendons are in the tensile zone)

fy Yield strength of rebar

k PT material constant (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-2)

Mn Nominal flexural resistance

Mr Factored flexural resistance

tslabeq Thickness of the composite slab

𝛼𝛼1 Stress block factor, as specified in AASHTO LRFD 2015 Interim Sec-
tion 5.7.2.2.

β1 Stress block factor, as specified in AASHTO LRFD Section 5.7.2.2

φ Resistance factor for flexure

6.3.2 Design Process


The derivation of the moment resistance of the section is based on the approxi-
mate stress distribution specified in AASHTO LRFD Article 5.7.2.2. The natural
relationship between concrete stress and strain is considered satisfied by an
equivalent rectangular concrete compressive stress block of 𝛼𝛼1 𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ over a zone
bounded by the edges of the cross-section and a straight line located parallel to
the neutral axis at the distance a = β 1 c from the extreme compression fiber. If
the AASHTO LRFD 2015 interim is selected the factor 𝛼𝛼1 is taken as 0.85 for

Flexure Design 6 - 11
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

specified compressive strengths not exceeding 10.0 ksi. For specified concrete
compressive strengths exceeding 10.0ksi, 𝛼𝛼1 is reduced at rate of 0.02 for each
1.0ksi of strength in excess of 10.0ksi, except that 𝛼𝛼1 is not taken less than 0.75.
For AASHTO LRFD no interim the 𝛼𝛼1 is always taken as 0.85 independent of
concrete compressive strength. The distance c is measured perpendicular to the
neutral axis. The factor β 1 is taken as 0.85 for concrete strengths not exceeding
4.0 ksi. For concrete strengths exceeding 4.0 ksi, β 1 is reduced at a rate of 0.05
for each 1.0 ksi of strength in excess of 4.0 ksi, except that β 1 is not to be taken
to be less than 0.65.

The flexural resistance is determined in accordance with AASHTO LRFD Para-


graph 5.7.3.2. The resistance is evaluated for bending about horizontal axis 3
only. Separate capacity is calculated for positive and negative moment. The ca-
pacity is based on bonded tendons and mild steel located in the tension zone as
defined in the Bridge Object. Tendons and mild steel reinforcement located in
the compression zone are not considered. It is assumed that all defined tendons
in a section, stressed or not, have f pe (effective stress after loses) larger than 0.5
f pu (specified tensile strength). If a certain tendon should not be considered for
the flexural capacity calculation, its area must be set to zero.

The section properties are calculated for the section before skew, grade, and su-
perelevation have been applied. This is consistent with the demands being re-
ported in the section local axis. It is assumed that the effective width of the flange
(slab) in compression is equal to the width of the slab.

6.3.3 Algorithms
At each section:

All section properties and demands are converted from CSiBridge model units
to N, mm.

The equivalent slab thickness is evaluated based on the tributary slab area and
the slab width assuming a rectangular shape.

Aslab
tslabeq =
bslab

6 - 12 Flexure Design
Chapter 6 - Design Multi-Cell Concrete Box Bridges using AMA

The 𝛼𝛼1 stress block factor is evaluated in accordance with AASHTO LRFD
5.7.2.2 based on section f ′c

For AASHTO LRFD 2015 Interim

𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ − 10
𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ > 10.0𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘, 𝑡𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝛼𝛼 1 = 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 �0.85 − 0.02; 0.75�
1.0

else 𝛼𝛼1 = 0.85

For AASHTO LRFD No Interim

𝛼𝛼1 = 0.85

β1 stress block factor is evaluated in accordance with AASHTO LRFD 5.7.2.2


based on section f ′c .

 f ′ − 28 
If f ′c > 28 MPa,=
then β1 max  0.85 − c 0.05; 0.65  ;
 7 

else β1 =0.85.

The tendon and rebar location, area, and material are read. Only bonded tendons
are processed; unbonded tendons are ignored.

Tendons and rebar are split into two groups depending on the sign of moment
they resistnegative or positive. A tendon or rebar is considered to resist a pos-
itive moment when it is located outside of the top fiber compression stress block
and is considered to resist a negative moment when it is located outside of the
bottom fiber compression stress block. The compression stress block extends
over a zone bounded by the edges of the cross-section and a straight line located
parallel to the neutral axis at the distance a = β 1 c from the extreme compression
fiber. The distance c is measured perpendicular to the neutral axis.

For each tendon group, an area weighted average of the following values is
determined:

sum of the tendon areas, A PS

center of gravity of the tendons, d P

Flexure Design 6 - 13
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

specified tensile strength of prestressing steel f pu

constant k (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-2)

 f py 
=k 2  1.04 − 
 f pu 

For each rebar group, the following values are determined:

sum of tension rebar areas, A s

distance from the extreme compression fiber to the centroid of the tension
rebar, d s

Positive moment resistance – first it is assumed that the equivalent compression


stress block is within the top slab. Distance c between the neutral axis and the
compressive face is calculated in accordance with (AASHTO LRFD eq.
5.7.3.1.1-4)

APS f PU + As f s
c=
f pu
α1 f ′cβ1bslab + kAPS
dp

The distance c is compared against requirement of Section 5.7.2.1 to verify if


stress in mild reinforcement f s can be taken as equal to f y . The limit on ratio c/d s
is calculated depending on what kind of code and its interim are specified in the
Bridge Design Preferences form as shown in the table below:

Code AASHTO LRFD 2012 AASHTO LRFD 2012


No Interims with 2013 Interims or
later
𝑐𝑐 0.6 0.003

𝑑𝑑𝑠𝑠 0.003 + 𝜀𝜀𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐

where the compression control strain limit 𝜀𝜀𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 is per AASHTO LRFD 2013 In-
terims table C5.7.2.1-1

When the limit is not satisfied the stress in mild reinforcement f s is reduced to
satisfy the requirement of Section 5.7.2.1.

6 - 14 Flexure Design
Chapter 6 - Design Multi-Cell Concrete Box Bridges using AMA

The distance c is compared to the equivalent slab thickness to determine if the


section is a T-section or rectangular section.

If cβ1 > tslabeq , the section is a T-section.

If the section is a T-section, the distance c is recalculated in accordance with


(AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-3).

APS f PU + As f s − α1 f ′c ( bslab − bwebeq ) tslabeq


c=
f pu
α1 f ′c β1bwebeq + kAPS
y pt

Average stress in prestressing steel f ps is calculated in accordance with


(AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-1).

 c 
=
fPS fPU  1 − k 
 dp 

Nominal flexural resistance M n is calculated in accordance with (AASHTO


LRFD eq. 5.7.3.2.2-1).

If the section is a T-section, then

 cβ   cβ   cβ tslabeq 
M n APS f PS  d p − 1  + AS f s  d s − 1  + α1 f ′c ( bslab − bwebeq ) tslabeq  1 −
= ;
 2   2   2 2 

else

 cβ   cβ 
=
M n APS f PS  d p − 1  + AS f s  d s − 1  .
 2   2 

Factored flexural resistance is obtained by multiplying M n by φ.

Mr = ϕM n

Extreme moment M3 demands are found from the specified demand sets and the
controlling demand set name is recorded.

The process for evaluating negative moment resistance is analogous.

Flexure Design 6 - 15
Chapter 7
Design Concrete Slab Bridges

This chapter describes the algorithms used by CSiBridge for design checks when
the superstructure is a concrete slab deck.

When interim revisions of the codes are published by the relevant authorities,
and (when applicable) they are subsequently incorporated into CSiBridge, the
program gives the user an option to select what type of interims shall be used for
the design. The interims can be selected by clicking on the Code Preferences
button.

In CSiBridge, when distributing loads for concrete slab flexure and shear design,
the section is always treated as one beam; all load demands (permanent and tran-
sient) are distributed evenly to the entire slab section. For stress check when area
model is used the stresses are read from the area elements, when spine model is
used the stresses are calculated based on a beam theory, assuming the entire slab
width as effectively resisting the loads.

With respect to shear and torsion check, in accordance with AASHTO LRFD
Article 5.8.3.4.2 of the code, torsion is ignored.

The user has an option to select “No Interims” or “YYYY Interims” on the
Bridge Design Preferences form. The form can be opened by clicking the Code
Preferences button.

Stress Design 7-1


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

The revisions published in the 2015 interims were incorporated into the Flexure
Design.

7.1 Stress Design


The following parameters are considered during stress design:

PhiC – Resistance Factor; Default Value = 1.0, Typical value: 1.0. The compres-
sion and tension limits are multiplied by the φ C factor.

FactorCompLim – f ′c multiplier; Default Value = 0.4; Typical values: 0.4 to


0.6. The f ′c is multiplied by the FactorCompLim to obtain compression limit.

FactorTensLim – f 'c multiplier; Default Value = 0.19 (ksi), 0.5(MPa); Typi-


cal values: 0 to 0.24 (ksi), 0 to 0.63 (MPa). The f 'c is multiplied by the Fac-
torTensLim to obtain tension limit.

The stresses are evaluated at three points at the top fiber of the slab and three
points at the bottom fiber of the slab: the left corner, the centerline and the right
corner of the slab. The location is labeled in the output plots and tables. See
Chapter 9, Section 9.1.1. The stresses assume linear distribution and take into
account axial (P) and both bending moments (M2 and M3).

Concrete strength f ′c is read at every point, and compression and tension limits
are evaluated using the FactorCompLim - f ′c multiplier and FactorTensLim -
f 'c multiplier.

The stresses are evaluated for each demand set (Chapter 4). If the demand set
contains live load, the program positions the load to capture extreme stress at
each of the evaluation points.

Extremes are found for each point and the controlling demand set name is rec-
orded.

7.2 Shear Design


The following parameters are considered during shear design:

7-2 Stress Design


Chapter 7 - Design Concrete Slab Bridges

PhiC – Resistance Factor; Default Value = 0.9, Typical values: 0.7 to 0.9. The
nominal shear capacity of normal weight concrete sections is multiplied by the
resistance factor to obtain factored resistance.

PhiC (Lightweight) – Resistance Factor for light-weight concrete; Default Value


= 0.7, Typical values: 0.7 to 0.9. The nominal shear capacity of light-weight
concrete sections is multiplied by the resistance factor to obtain factored re-
sistance.

Check Sub Type – Typical value: MCFT. Specifies which method for shear de-
sign will be used: either Modified Compression Field Theory (MCFT) in ac-
cordance with AASHTO LRFD Section 5.8.3.4.2; or the Vci/Vcw method in
accordance with AASHTO LRFD Section 5.8.3.4.3. Currently only the MCFT
option is available.

Negative limit on strain in nonprestressed longitudinal reinforcement in accord-


ance with AASHTO LRFD Section 5.8.3.4.2; Default Value = −0.4x10−3, Typi-
cal value(s): 0 to −0.4x10−3.

Positive limit on strain in nonprestressed longitudinal reinforcement in accord-


ance with AASHTO LRFD Section 5.8.3.4.2; Default Value = 6.0x10−3, Typical
value: 6.0x10−3.

PhiC for N u – Resistance Factor used in AASHTO LRFD Equation 5.8.3.5-1;


Default Value = 1.0, Typical values: 0.75 to 1.0.

Phif for M u – Resistance Factor used in AASHTO LRFD Equation 5.8.3.5-1;


Default Value = 0.9, Typical values: 0.9 to 1.0.

sx – Maximum distance between layers of longitudinal crack control reinforce-


ment per AASHTO LRFD 5.8.3.4.2-5.

ag – Maximum aggregate size, Eq 5.8.3.4.2. This parameter is used only when


min transverse reinforcement is not provided.

Type of shear rebar proportioning - Specify approach to proportioning of trans-


verse reinforcement per AASHTO LRFD Section C5.8.3.2. There are two op-
tions: proportioning per Figure C5.8.3.2-1 (Default) and proportioning per Fig-
ure C5.8.3.2-2.

Shear Design 7-3


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Method for determining sign of MuMin - Specify option of how to determine


sign of MuMin=(Vu-Vp)*dv when demand Mu<(Vu-Vp)*dv (Eq. 5.8.3.4.2-4).
There are four options: 1:Automatic by CSiBridge; 2:Sign of MuMin equal to
Mu; 3:Add two MuMin - one positive, one negative; and 4:do not generate
MuMin, use Mu.

7.2.1 Variables
Ac Area of concrete on the flexural tension side of the member

Aps Area of prestressing steel on the flexural tension side of the member

Avl Area of nonprestressed steel on the flexural tension side of the member
at the section under consideration

AVS Area of transverse shear reinforcement per unit length

AVS min Minimum area of transverse shear reinforcement per unit length in
accordance with AASHTO LRFD Equation 5.8.2.5

a Depth of equivalent stress block in accordance with AASHTO LRFD


Section 5.7.3.2.2. Varies for positive and negative moment.

b Slab width

bv Effective web is equal to slab width

dgirder Depth of the slab

dPTbot Distance from the top of the slab to the center of gravity of the tendons
in the bottom of the slab

dv Effective shear depth in accordance with AASHTO LRFD 5.8.2.9

Ec Young’s modulus of concrete

Ep Prestressing steel Young’s modulus

Es Reinforcement Young’s modulus

7-4 Shear Design


Chapter 7 - Design Concrete Slab Bridges

f pu Specified tensile strength of the prestressing steel

Mu Factored moment at the section

Nu Applied factored axial force, taken as positive if tensile

Vp Component in the direction of the applied shear of the effective pre-


stressing force; if Vp has the same sign as Vu, the component is resist-
ing the applied shear.

Vu Factored shear demand excluding force in tendons

V2 c Shear in the Section Cut excluding the force in tendons

V2Tot Shear in the Section Cut including the force in tendons

εs Strain in nonprestressed longitudinal tension reinforcement


(AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.4.2-4)

ε sLimitPos , ε sLimitNeg = Max and min value of strain in nonprestressed longitudinal


tension reinforcement as specified in the Design Request

ϕV Resistance factor for shear

ϕP Resistance factor for axial load

ϕF Resistance factor for moment

7.2.2 Design Process


The shear resistance is determined in accordance with AASHTO LRFD para-
graph 5.8.3.4.2 (derived from Modified Compression Field Theory). The proce-
dure assumes that the concrete shear stresses are distributed uniformly over an
area b v wide and d v deep, that the direction of principal compressive stresses
(defined by angle θ and shown as D) remains constant over d v , and that the shear
strength of the section can be determined by considering the biaxial stress con-
ditions at just one location in the slab. For design, the user should select only
those sections that comply with these assumptions by defining appropriate sta-
tion ranges in the Design Request (see Chapter 4).

Shear Design 7-5


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

The effective slab width is taken as the equivalent slab width, calculated as a
fraction of the total slab area and the slab thickness. The presence of grouted or
ungrouted ducts is not considered.

Shear design is completed on a per-entire section basis.

7.2.3 Algorithms
All section properties and demands are converted from CSiBridge model units
to N, mm.

For every COMBO specified in the Design Request that contains envelopes, a
new force demand set is generated. The new force demand set is built up from
the maximum tension values of P and the maximum absolute values of V2 and
M3 of the two StepTypes (Max and Min) present in the envelope COMBO case.
The StepType of this new force demand set is named ABS and the signs of the
P, V2 and M3 are preserved. The ABS case follows the industry practice where
sections are designed for extreme shear and moments that are not necessarily
corresponding to the same design vehicle position. The section cut is designed
for all three StepTypes in the COMBOMax, Min and ABSand the control-
ling StepType is reported.

In cases where the demand moment Mu < Vu − Vp × dv , two new force demand sets
= Vu − Vp dvpos and Muneg
are generated where Mupos = Vu − Vp dvneg . The acronyms
“-CodeMinMuPos” and “-CodeMinMuNeg” are added to the end of the
StepType name. The signs of the P and V2 are preserved.

The component in the direction of the applied shear of the effective prestressing
force, positive if resisting the applied shear, is evaluated:

V2 c − V2Tot
Vp =
ngirders

The depth of the equivalent stress block ‘a’ for both positive and negative mo-
ment is evaluated in accordance with AASHTO LRFD Equation 5.7.3.1.1.

Effective shear depth is evaluated.

=
If M u > 0, then dv max ( 0.72 × dgirder , 0.9 × dPTbot , dPTbot − 0.5 × a ) .

7-6 Shear Design


Chapter 7 - Design Concrete Slab Bridges

If M u < 0, then

=dv max 0.72 × dgirder ,0.9 × (dgirder − 0.5 × dcompslab ),(dgirder − 0.5 × dcompslab ) − 0.5 × a  .

The demand/capacity ratio (D/C) is calculated based on the maximum permissi-


ble shear capacity at a section in accordance with AASHTO LRFD Section
5.8.3.2-2.

Vu
− Vp
D φV
= (AASHTO LRFD 5.8.3.2-2)
C 0.25 × f 'c × b × dv

Evaluate the numerator and denominator of (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.4.2-4).

Mu
ε snumerator = + 0.5 × N u + Vu − Vp − Aps × 0.7 × f pu
dV

ε sdenominator = E p × Aps + Es × Avl

Adjust denominator values as follows.

If ε sdenominator = 0 and ε snumerator > 0, then ε s = ε sLimitPos and

ε snumerator
− E p × Aps
εs
Avl = .
Es

If ε snumerator <0, then ε sdenominator = E p × Aps + Es × Avl + Ec × Ac

Evaluate (eq. 5.8.3.4.2-4).

ε
ε s = snumerator
ε sdenominator

Check if axial tension is large enough to crack the flexural compression face of
the section.

Nu
If > 0.52 × f 'c , then ε s = 2 × ε s .
Agirder

Shear Design 7-7


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Check against the limit on the strain in nonprestressed longitudinal tension rein-
forcement specified in the Design Request, and if necessary, recalculate how
much longitudinal rebar is needed to reach the EpsSpos tension limit.

=
ε s max(ε s , ε sLimitNeg ) and ε=
s min(ε s , ε sLimitPos )

Evaluate the angle θ of inclination of diagonal compressive stresses as deter-


mined in AASHTO LRFD Article 5.8.3.4.

18 ≤ 29 + 3500 × ε s ≤ 45 (AASHTO LRFD 5.8.3.4)

Evaluate the factor indicating the ability of diagonally cracked concrete to trans-
mit tension and shear, as specified in AASHTO LRFD Article 5.8.3.4.

4.8
β= (AASHTO LRFD 5.8.3.4)
1 + 750 × ε s

Evaluate the nominal shear resistance provided by tensile stresses in the concrete
(AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.3-3).

=
Vc 0.083 × β × λ × f 'c × b × d v

Evaluate how much shear demand is left to be carried by rebar.

Vu
VS = − Vp − Vc
ϕs

Vs
If VS < 0 , then AVS = 0; else AVS = .
1
f y × dv ×
tanθ
(AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.3-4)

Check against minimum transverse shear reinforcement.

0.083 × λ f 'c × b
If Vu > 0.5 × φs × Vc + Vp , then AVSmin = in accord-
fy
ance with (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.2.5-1); else AVS min = 0.

If VS < 0, then AVS = AVSmin ; else AVS = max( AVSmin , AVS ).

7-8 Shear Design


Chapter 7 - Design Concrete Slab Bridges

Recalculate V s in accordance with (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.3-4).

1
VS = AVS × f y × dv × .
tanθ

Evaluate the longitudinal rebar on the flexure tension side in accordance with
(AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.5-1).

 VU  Vu  
 − VP − 0.5 × min  VS ,  
 φS  φ 
− E p × Aps  ×
MU NU 1
A=  d × φ + 0.5 × φ + tanθ
SLreq
 v f P  fy
AVL = max( AVL , ASLreq )

Assign longitudinal rebar to the top or bottom side of the girder based on the
moment sign.

If MU < 0, then AVLCompSlabU = AVL and AVLBeamBotFlange = 0,

else AVLCompSlabU = 0 and AVLBeamBotFlange = AVL .

7.3 Flexure Design


The following parameter is used in the design of flexure:

PhiC – Resistance Factor; Default Value = 1.0, Typical value(s): 1.0. The nom-
inal flexural capacity is multiplied by the resistance factor to obtain factored re-
sistance

7.3.1 Variables
A PS Area of the PT in the tension zone

AS Area of reinforcement in the tension zone

Aslab Area of the slab

a Depth of the equivalent stress block in accordance with AASHTO


LRFD 5.7.3.2.2

Flexure Design 7-9


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

bslab Effective flange width = equivalent width of the slab = area/thick-


ness

dP Distance from the extreme compression fiber to the centroid of the


prestressing tendons in the tension zone

dS Distance from the extreme compression fiber to the centroid of the


rebar in the tension zone

f ps Average stress in prestressing steel (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-1)

f pu Specified tensile strength of prestressing steel (area weighted aver-


age of all tendons in the tensile zone)

f py Yield tensile strength of prestressing steel (area weighted average of


all tendons are in the tensile zone)

fy Yield strength of rebar

k PT material constant (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-2)

Mn Nominal flexural resistance

Mr Factored flexural resistance

tslab Thickness of the slab

𝛼𝛼1 Stress block factor, as specified in AASHTO LRFD 2015 Interim Sec-
tion 5.7.2.2.

β1 Stress block factor, as specified in AASHTO LRFD Section 5.7.2.2

φ Resistance factor for flexure

7.3.2 Design Process


The derivation of the moment resistance of the section is based on the approxi-
mate stress distribution specified in AASHTO LRFD Article 5.7.2.2. The natural
relationship between concrete stress and strain is considered satisfied by an
equivalent rectangular concrete compressive stress block of 𝛼𝛼1 𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ over a zone

7 - 10 Flexure Design
Chapter 7 - Design Concrete Slab Bridges

bounded by the edges of the cross-section and a straight line located parallel to
the neutral axis at the distance a = β 1 c from the extreme compression fiber. If
the AASHTO LRFD 2015 interim is selected the factor 𝛼𝛼1 is taken as 0.85 for
specified compressive strengths not exceeding 10.0 ksi. For specified concrete
compressive strengths exceeding 10.0ksi, 𝛼𝛼1 is reduced at rate of 0.02 for each
1.0ksi of strength in excess of 10.0ksi, except that 𝛼𝛼1 is not taken less than 0.75.
For AASHTO LRFD no interim the 𝛼𝛼1 is always taken as 0.85 independent of
concrete compressive strength. The distance c is measured perpendicular to the
neutral axis. The factor β 1 is taken as 0.85 for concrete strengths not exceeding
4.0 ksi. For concrete strengths exceeding 4.0 ksi, β 1 is reduced at a rate of 0.05
for each 1.0 ksi of strength in excess of 4.0 ksi, except that β 1 is not to be taken
to be less than 0.65.

The flexural resistance is determined in accordance with AASHTO LRFD Para-


graph 5.7.3.2. The resistance is evaluated for bending about horizontal axis 3
only. Separate capacity is calculated for positive and negative moment. The ca-
pacity is based on bonded tendons and mild steel located in the tension zone as
defined in the Bridge Object. Tendons and mild steel reinforcement located in
the compression zone are not considered. It is assumed that all defined tendons
in a section, stressed or not, have f pe (effective stress after loses) larger than 0.5
f pu (specified tensile strength). If a certain tendon should not be considered for
the flexural capacity calculation, its area must be set to zero.

The section properties are calculated for the section before skew, grade, and su-
perelevation have been applied. This is consistent with the demands being re-
ported in the section local axis. It is assumed that the effective width of the slab
in compression is equal to the equivalent width of the slab (=area/thickness)

7.3.3 Algorithms
At each section:

All section properties and demands are converted from CSiBridge model units
to N, mm.

The equivalent slab width is evaluated based on the slab area and the slab width
assuming a rectangular shape.

Flexure Design 7 - 11
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Aslab
bslab =
tslab

The 𝛼𝛼1 stress block factor is evaluated in accordance with AASHTO LRFD
5.7.2.2 based on section f ′c

For AASHTO LRFD 2015 Interim

𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ − 10
𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ > 10.0𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘, 𝑡𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝛼𝛼 1 = 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 �0.85 − 0.02; 0.75�
1.0

else 𝛼𝛼1 = 0.85

For AASHTO LRFD No Interim

𝛼𝛼1 = 0.85

β1 stress block factor is evaluated in accordance with AASHTO LRFD 5.7.2.2


based on section f ′c .

 f ′ − 28 
If f ′c > 28 MPa,=
then β1 max  0.85 − c 0.05; 0.65  ;
 7 

else β1 =0.85.

The tendon and rebar location, area, and material are read. Only bonded tendons
are processed; unbonded tendons are ignored.

Tendons and rebar are split into two groups depending on the sign of moment
they resistnegative or positive. A tendon or rebar is considered to resist a pos-
itive moment when it is located outside of the top fiber compression stress block
and is considered to resist a negative moment when it is located outside of the
bottom fiber compression stress block. The compression stress block extends
over a zone bounded by the edges of the cross-section and a straight line located
parallel to the neutral axis at the distance a = β 1 c from the extreme compression
fiber. The distance c is measured perpendicular to the neutral axis.

7 - 12 Flexure Design
Chapter 7 - Design Concrete Slab Bridges

For each tendon group, an area weighted average of the following values is
determined:

sum of the tendon areas, A PS

center of gravity of the tendons, d P

specified tensile strength of prestressing steel f pu

constant k (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-2)

 f py 
=k 2  1.04 − 
 f pu 

For each rebar group, the following values are determined:

sum of tension rebar areas, A s

distance from the extreme compression fiber to the centroid of the tension
rebar, d s

Positive moment resistance – first it is assumed that the equivalent compression


stress block is within the top slab. Distance c between the neutral axis and the
compressive face is calculated in accordance with (AASHTO LRFD eq.
5.7.3.1.1-4)

APS f PU + As f s
c=
f pu
α1 f ′cβ1bslab + kAPS
dp

The distance c is compared against requirement of Section 5.7.2.1 to verify if


stress in mild reinforcement f s can be taken as equal to f y . The limit on ratio c/d s
is calculated depending on what kind of code and its interim are specified in the
Bridge Design Preferences form as shown in the table below:

Code AASHTO LRFD 2012 AASHTO LRFD 2012


No Interims with 2013 Interims or
later

Flexure Design 7 - 13
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

𝑐𝑐 0.6 0.003

𝑑𝑑𝑠𝑠 0.003 + 𝜀𝜀𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐

where the compression control strain limit 𝜀𝜀𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 is per AASHTO LRFD 2013 In-
terims table C5.7.2.1-1

When the limit is not satisfied the stress in mild reinforcement f s is reduced to
satisfy the requirement of Section 5.7.2.1.

 cβ   cβ 
=
M n APS f PS  d p − 1  + AS f s  d s − 1  .
 2   2 

Factored flexural resistance is obtained by multiplying M n by φ.

Mr = ϕM n

Extreme moment M3 demands are found from the specified demand sets and the
controlling demand set name is recorded.

The process for evaluating negative moment resistance is analogous.

7 - 14 Flexure Design
Chapter 8
Design Precast Concrete Girder Bridges

This chapter describes the algorithms used by CSiBridge for design and stress
check when the superstructure has a deck that includes precast I or U girders
with composite slabs in accordance with the AASHTO LRFD 2014 (AASHTO
LRFD) code.

When interim revisions of the codes are published by the relevant authori-
ties, and (when applicable) they are subsequently incorporated into
CSiBridge, the program gives the user an option to select what type of inter-
ims shall be used for the design. The interims can be selected by clicking on
the Code Preferences button.

The user has an option to select “No Interims” or “YYYY Interims” on the
Bridge Design Preferences form. The form can be opened by clicking the
Code Preferences button.

The revisions published in the 2015 interims were incorporated into the Flex-
ure Design.

8.1 Stress Design


The following parameters are considered during stress design:

Stress Design 8-1


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

PhiC – Resistance Factor; Default Value = 1.0, Typical value: 1.0. The com-
pression and tension limits are multiplied by the φC factor.

FactorCompLim – f ′c multiplier; Default Value = 0.4; Typical values: 0.4 to


0.6. The f ′c is multiplied by the FactorCompLim to obtain compression limit.

FactorTensLim – f ' c multiplier; Default Value = 0.19 (ksi), 0.5(MPa); Typ-


ical values: 0 to 0.24 (ksi), 0 to 0.63 (MPa). The f'c is multiplied by the
FactorTensLim to obtain tension limit.

The stresses are evaluated at three points at the top fiber of the composite
slab: the left corner, the centerline beam and the right corner of the compo-
site slab tributary area. The locations of stress output points at the slab bottom
fiber and the beam top and bottom fibers depend on the type of precast beam
present in the section cut. The locations are labeled in the output plots and
tables.

Concrete strength f ′c is read at every point and compression and tension lim-
its are evaluated using the FactorCompLim – f ′c multiplier and Fac-
torTensLim – f ' c multiplier.

The stresses assume linear distribution and take into account axial (P) and
either both bending moments (M2 and M3) or only P and M3, depending on
which method for determining the LLD factor has been specified in the De-
sign Request (see Chapters 3 and 4).

The stresses are evaluated for each demand set (Chapter 4). Extremes are
found for each point and the controlling demand set name is recorded.

The stress limits are evaluated by applying the preceding Parameters.

8.2 Shear Design


The following parameters are considered during shear design:

8-2 Shear Design


Chapter 8 - Design Precast Concrete Girder Bridges

PhiC – Resistance Factor; Default Value = 0.9, Typical values: 0.7 to 0.9. The
nominal shear capacity of normal weight concrete sections is multiplied by
the resistance factor to obtain factored resistance.

PhiC (Lightweight) – Resistance Factor for light-weight concrete; Default


Value = 0.7, Typical values: 0.7 to 0.9. The nominal shear capacity of light-
weight concrete sections is multiplied by the resistance factor to obtain fac-
tored resistance.

Check Sub Type – Typical value: MCFT. Specifies which method for shear
design will be used: Modified Compression Field Theory (MCFT) in accord-
ance with AASHTO LRFD section 5.8.3.4.2; or the Vci/Vcw method in ac-
cordance with AASHTO LRFD section 5.8.3.4.3. Currently, only the MCFT
option is available.

Negative limit on strain in nonprestressed longitudinal reinforcement in ac-


cordance with AASHTO LRFD section 5.8.3.4.2; Default Value = −0.4x10-3,
Typical value(s): 0 to −0.4x10-3.

Positive limit on strain in nonprestressed longitudinal reinforcement in ac-


cordance with AASHTO LRFD section 5.8.3.4.2; Default Value = 6.0x10-3,
Typical value(s): 6.0x10-3.

PhiC for Nu – Resistance Factor used in equation 5.8.3.5-1 of the code; Default
Value = 1.0, Typical values: 0.75 to 1.0.

Phif for Mu – Resistance Factor used in AASHTO LRFD equation 5.8.3.5-1;


Default Value = 0.9, Typical values: 0.9 to 1.0.

 sx – Maximum distance between layers of longitudinal crack control


reinforcement per AASHTO LRFD 5.8.3.4.2-5.

 ag – Maximum aggregate size, Eq 5.8.3.4.2. This parameter is used only


when min transverse reinforcement is not provided.

 Type of shear rebar proportioning - Specify approach to proportioning


of transverse reinforcement per AASHTO LRFD Section C5.8.3.2. There are
two options: proportioning per Figure C5.8.3.2-1 (Default) and proportioning
per Figure C5.8.3.2-2.

Shear Design 8-3


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

 Method for determining sign of MuMin - Specify option of how to de-


termine sign of MuMin=(Vu-Vp)*dv when demand Mu<(Vu-Vp)*dv (Eq.
5.8.3.4.2-4). There are four options: 1:Automatic by CSiBridge; 2:Sign of
MuMin equal to Mu; 3:Add two MuMin - one positive, one negative; and 4:do
not generate MuMin, use Mu.

8.2.1 Variables
a Depth of the equivalent stress block in accordance with AASHTO
LRFD section 5.7.3.2.2. Varies for positive and negative moment.

Ac Area of concrete on the flexural tension side of the member

A ps Area of prestressing steel on the flexural tension side of the member

A VS Area of transverse shear reinforcement per unit length

A VSmin Minimum area of transverse shear reinforcement per unit length in


accordance with (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.2.5)

A vl Area of nonprestressed steel on the flexural tension side of the


member at the section under consideration

b Minimum web width of the beam

dv Effective shear depth in accordance with AASHTO LRFD section


5.8.2.9

d girder Depth of the girder

d compslab Depth of the composite slab (includes concrete haunch t2)

d PTBot Distance from the top of the composite slab to the center of gravity
of the tendons in the bottom of the precast beam

Ec Young’s modulus of concrete

Ep Prestressing steel Young’s modulus

8-4 Shear Design


Chapter 8 - Design Precast Concrete Girder Bridges

Es Reinforcement Young’s modulus

f pu Specified tensile strength of prestressing steel

Mu Factored moment at the section

Nu Applied factored axial force, taken as positive if tensile

V 2c Shear in Section Cut, excluding the force in the tendons

V 2tot Shear in Section Cut, including the force in the tendons

Vp Component in the direction of the applied shear of the effective


prestressing force; if V p has the same sign as V u , the component is
resisting the applied shear.

Vu Factored shear demand per girder, excluding the force in the ten-
dons

εs Strain in nonprestressed longitudinal tension reinforcement


(AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.4.2-4)

ε sLimitPos , ε sLimitNeg = Max and min value of strain in nonprestressed longitudinal


tension reinforcement as specified in the Design Request

φV Resistance factor for shear

φP Resistance factor for axial load

φF Resistance factor for moment

8.2.2 Design Process


The shear resistance is determined in accordance with AASHTO LRFD para-
graph 5.8.3.4.2 (derived from Modified Compression Field Theory). The pro-
cedure assumes that the concrete shear stresses are distributed uniformly over
an area b v wide and d v deep, that the direction of principal compressive
stresses (defined by angle θ and shown as D) remains constant over d v , and
that the shear strength of the section can be determined by considering the
biaxial stress conditions at just one location in the web. The user should select

Shear Design 8-5


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

for design only those sections that comply with these assumptions by defining
appropriate station ranges in the Design Request (see Chapter 4).

It is assumed that the precast beams are pre-tensioned, and therefore, no


ducts are present in webs. The effective web width is taken as the minimum
web width, measured parallel to the neutral axis, between the resultants of
the tensile and compressive forces as a result of flexure.

Shear design is completed on a per-girder basis. Please refer to Chapter 3 for


a description of the live load distribution to individual girders.

8.2.3 Algorithms
 All section properties and demands are converted from CSiBridge model
units to N, mm.

 For every COMBO specified in the Design Request that contains envelopes,
two new force demand sets are generated. The new force demand sets are
built up from the maximum tension values of P and the maximum and min-
imum values of V2 and minimum values of M3 of the two StepTypes (Max
and Min) present in the envelope COMBO case. The StepType of these new
force demand sets are named MaxM3MinV2 and MinM3MaxV2, respec-
tively. The signs of all force components are preserved. The two new cases
are added to comply with industry practice where sections are designed for
extreme shear and moments that are not necessarily corresponding to the
same design vehicle position. The section cut is designed for all four
StepTypes in the COMBOMax, Min, MaxM3MinV2, and
MinM3MaxV2and the controlling StepType is reported.

 In cases where the demand moment Mu < Vu − Vp × dv , two new force de-
mand sets are generated where = Vu − Vp dvpos
Mupos and
Muneg =
− Vu − Vp dvnneg . The acronyms “-CodeMinMuPos” and “-
CodeMinMuNeg” are added to the end of the StepType name. The signs of
the P and V2 are preserved. The component in the direction of the applied
shear of the effective prestressing force, positive if resisting the applied
shear, is evaluated:

8-6 Shear Design


Chapter 8 - Design Precast Concrete Girder Bridges

V2 c − V2tot
Vp =
ngirders

 Depth of equivalent stress block ‘a’ for both positive and negative moment
is evaluated in accordance with (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1).

 Effective shear depth is evaluated.

=
If M u > 0, then dv max ( 0.72 × dgirder ,0.9 × dPTbot , dPTbot − 0.5 × a ) .

If M u < 0, then

=dv max 0.72 × dgirder ,0.9 × ( dgirder − 0.5 × dcompslab ) , ( dgirder − 0.5 × dcompslab ) − 0.5 × a  .

If Mu < Vu − Vp × dv , then Mu = (Vu − Vp ) × dv .

 The demand/capacity (D/C) ratio is calculated based on the maximum per-


missible shear capacity at a section in accordance with AASHTO LRFD
5.8.3.2-2.

Vu
− Vp
D φV
= (AASHTO LRFD 5.8.3.2-2)
C 0.25 × f 'c × b × dv

 Evaluate the numerator and denominator of (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.4.2-4):

Mu
ε snumerator = + 0.5 × N u + Vu − Vp − Aps × 0.7 × f pu
dV

ε sdenominator = E p × Aps + Es × Avl

 Adjust denominator values as follows

If ε sdenominator =
0 and ε snumerator > 0, then ε s =ε sLimitPos and
ε snumerator
− E p × Aps
εs
Avl = .
Es

Shear Design 8-7


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

If ε snumerator < 0, then ε sdenominator = E p × Aps + Es × Avl + Ec × Ac .

 Evaluate (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.4.2-4):

ε
ε s = snumerator
ε sdenominator

 Check if axial tension is large enough to crack the flexural compression face
of the section.

Nu
If > 0.52 × f 'c , then ε s = 2 × ε s .
Agirder

 Check against the limit on the strain in nonprestressed longitudinal tension


reinforcement specified in the Design Request, and if necessary, recalculate
how much longitudinal rebar is needed to reach the EpsSpos tension limit.

ε s max ( ε s , ε sLimitNeg ) and =


= ε s min ( ε s , ε sLimitPos )

 Evaluate the angle θ of inclination of diagonal compressive stresses as de-


termined in AASHTO LRFD Article 5.8.3.4.

18 ≤ 29 + 3500 × ε s ≤ 45 (AASHTO LRFD 5.8.3.4)

 Evaluate the factor indicating the ability of diagonally cracked concrete to


transmit tension and shear, as specified in AASHTO LRFD Article 5.8.3.4.

4.8
β= (AASHTO LRFD 5.8.3.4)
1 + 750 × ε s

 Evaluate nominal shear resistance provided by tensile stresses in the con-


crete AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.3-3.

=
Vc 0.083 × β × λ × f 'c × b × d v

 Evaluate how much shear demand is left to be carried by rebar.

Vu
VS = − Vp − Vc
ϕs

8-8 Shear Design


Chapter 8 - Design Precast Concrete Girder Bridges

If VS < 0 , then AVS = 0,

Vs
else AVS = . (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.3-4)
1
f y × dv ×
tanθ

 Check against minimum transverse shear reinforcement.

0.083 × λ f 'c × b
If Vu > 0.5 × φs × Vc + Vp , then AVSmin = in accord-
fy
ance with (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.2.5-1); else AVS min = 0.

If VS < 0 , then AVS = AVSmin , else AVS = max( AVSmin , AVS ).

 Recalculate Vs in accordance with (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.3-4).

1
VS = AVS × f y × dv ×
tanθ

 Evaluate longitudinal rebar on flexure tension side in accordance with


(AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.5-1).

 VU  Vu  
 − VP − 0.5 × min  VS ,  
 MU NU φS  φ  × 1
A=  d ×φ + 0.5 × + − E × A  f
φP tanθ
SLreq p ps
 v f  y
AVL = max( AVL , ASLreq )

 Assign longitudinal rebar to the top or bottom side of the girder based on
moment sign.

If M U < 0 , then AVLCompSlabU = AVL and AVLBeamBotFlange = 0;

else AVLCompSlabU = 0 and AVLBeamBotFlange = AVL .

8.2.4 Shear Design Example


The girder spacing is 9'-8". The girder type is AASHTO Type VI Girders, 72-
inch-deep, 42-inch-wide top flange and 28-inch-wide bottom flange

Shear Design 8-9


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

(AASHTO 28/72 Girders). The concrete deck is 8 inches thick, with the
haunch thickness assumed = 0.

Figure 8-1 Shear design example deck section

Materials
Concrete strength
Prestressed girders 28-day strength, f c′ = 6 ksi,
Girder final elastic modulus, E c = 4,415 ksi
Deck slab: 4.0 ksi, Deck slab elastic modulus, E s = 3,834 ksi
Reinforcing steel Yield strength, f y = 60 ksi

8 - 10 Shear Design
Chapter 8 - Design Precast Concrete Girder Bridges

Figure 8-2 Shear design example beam section

Prestressing strands 0.5-inch-diameter low relaxation strands Grade 270


Strand area, A ps = 0.153 in2
Steel yield strength, f py = 243 ksi
Steel ultimate strength, f pu = 270 ksi
Prestressing steel modulus, E p = 28,500 ksi

Basic beam section properties


Depth = 72 in.
Thickness of web = 8 in.
Area, A g = 1,085 in2

Shear Design 8 - 11
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

A c = Area of concrete on the flexural


tension side of the member (bordered
at mid depth of the beam + slab height) = 551 in2
Moment of inertia, Ig = 733,320 in4
N.A. to top, y t = 35.62 in.
N.A. to bottom, y b = 36.38 in.
P/S force eccentricity e = 31.380 in.

In accordance with AASHTO LRFD 2012 4.6.2.6, the effective flange


width of the concrete deck slab is taken as the tributary width. For the
interior beam, the b slab = 9'-8" = 116 in.

Demands at interior girder Section 2 = station 10’,


after girder Section 2, V u = 319.1 kip; M u = 3678 kip-ft

 The component in the direction of the applied shear of the effective pre-
stressing force, positive if resisting the applied shear, is evaluated:

V2c − V2tot
Vp = V p = 0 since no inclined tendons are present.
ngirders

 Depth of equivalent stress block ‘a’ for both positive and negative moment
is evaluated in accordance with (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1).

 Effective shear depth is evaluated:

Since M u > 0, then (for calculation of the depth of the compression


block, refer to the Flexure example in Section 7.3 of this manual)

dv max ( 0.72 × dgirder , 0.9 × dPTbot , dPTbot − 0.5 × a )


=
= max ( 0.72 × 80", 0.9 × 75", 75"− 0.5 × 5.314 × 0.85 )
= =
d v max ( 57.6",67.5",72.74") 72.74"

Value reported by CSiBridge = 72.74"

 Check if Mu < Vu − Vp × dv

M=
u = 44,136 kip-in > ( 319 − 0 ) × 72.74
3,678 × 12 = 23,204 kip-in

8 - 12 Shear Design
Chapter 8 - Design Precast Concrete Girder Bridges

 D/C is calculated based on the maximum permissible shear capacity at a


section in accordance with AASHTO LRFD 5.8.3.2-2.

Vu 319
− Vp −0
D φV 0.9
= = = 0.406
C 0.25 × f 'c × b × dv 0.25 × 6 × 8 × 72.74

Value reported by CSiBridge = 0.406

 Evaluate the numerator and denominator of (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.4.2-


4)

Mu
ε snumerator = + 0.5 × N u + Vu − Vp − Aps × 0.7 × f pu
dV
3678 × 12
= + 0.5 × 0 + 319 − 0 − 6.73 × 0.7 × 270 =−346.2 kip
72.74

ε sdenominator = E p × Aps + Es × Avl = 28500 ksi × 6.73 in 2 = 191805 kip

 Adjust denominator values as follows

If ε sdenominator = 0 and ε snumerator > 0, then ε s =ε sLimitPos and


ε snumerator
− E p × Aps
εs
Avl = is not applicable.
Es

If ε snumerator < 0, then


ε sdenominator = E p × Aps + Es × Avl + Ec × Ac
= 28500 × 6.73 + 4415 × 551.4= 26 263 461 kip

 Evaluate (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.4.2-4)

ε −346.2
ε s = snumerator = =−1.318E-4
ε sdenominator 2626346
Value reported by CSiBridge = −1.318E-4

 Check if axial tension is large enough to crack the flexural compression face
of the section.

Shear Design 8 - 13
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Nu
If > 0.52 × f 'c , then ε s = 2 × ε s ; this is not applicable since N u = 0.
Agirder

 Check against the limit on strain in nonprestressed longitudinal tension re-


inforcement as specified in the Design Request, and recalculate Avl.

ε s =max ( ε s , ε sLimitPos ) =max ( −1.318E-4, − 1.318E-4 − 4 ) =−1.318E-4

 Evaluate angle θ of inclination of diagonal compressive stresses as deter-


mined in AASHTO LRFD Article 5.8.3.4.

18 ≤ θ= 29 + 3500 × ε s ≤ 45 θ= 29 + 3500 × −1.318E-4= 28.5deg


Value reported by CSiBridge = 28.5 deg

 Evaluate factor indicating ability of diagonally cracked concrete to transmit


tension and shear as specified in AASHTO LRFD Article 5.8.3.4.

4.8 4.8
=β = = 5.3265
1 + 750 × ε s 1 + 750 × −1.318E-4
Value reported by CSiBridge = 5.3267

 Evaluate nominal shear resistance provided by tensile stresses in the con-


crete (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.3-3).

=Vc 0.0316 × β × λ × f 'c × b × dv


= 0.0316 × 5.32 × 1.0 × 6 × 8 × 72.74
= 239.92 kip
Value reported by CSiBridge = 240.00 kip

 Evaluate how much shear demand is left to be carried by rebar:

Vu 319
VS = − Vp − Vc = − 0 − 239.6 = 114.8 kip
φs 0.9

Value reported by CSiBridge = 114.64 kip

If VS < 0, then AVS = 0; else

8 - 14 Shear Design
Chapter 8 - Design Precast Concrete Girder Bridges

Vs 114.8
=AVS = = 1.43E-2 in 2 /in
1 1
f y × dv × 60 × 72.74 ×
tan θ tan 28.5
(AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.3-4)

 Check against minimum transverse shear reinforcement.

If Vu > 0.5 × φs × Vc + Vp − > 319.1 kip > 0.5 × 239.6 =


119.8 kip is true,
0.0316 × λ f 'c × b 0.0316 × 1.0 6 × 8
=AVS min = = 0.01032in 2 /in
fy 60
(AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.2.5-1)

If VS < 0 , then AVS = =


AVSmin ; else AVS max
= ( AVS min , AVS ) 1.43E-2in 2 /2
Value reported by CSiBridge = 1.43E-2in2/in

 Recalculate Vs in accordance with (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.3-4).

1 1
VS = AVS × f y × dv × = 0.0143 × 60 × 72.74 × = 114.9 kip
tan θ tan 28.5
Value reported by CSiBridge = 114.6 kip

 Evaluate longitudinal rebar on flexure tension side in accordance with


AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.8.3.5-1:

 VU  Vu  
 − VP − 0.5 × min  VS ,  
 φS φS 
 − E p × Aps  ×
MU NU 1
A=  d × φ + 0.5 × φ + tan θ
SLreq
 v f P  fy
 319 
 3678 × 12 − 0 − 0.5 × 114.9  1
 0 0.9
= + 0.5 × + − 28500 × 6.73  × =
−3176.3 in 2
 72.74 × 0.9 1.0 tan 28.5  60
Value reported by CSiBridge = 0.00 in2 → no additional longitudinal
rebar is required in the beam bottom flange.

Shear Design 8 - 15
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

8.3 Flexure Design


The following parameter is used in the design of flexure:

PhiC – Resistance Factor; Default Value = 1.0, Typical value: 1.0. The nominal
flexural capacity is multiplied by the resistance factor to obtain factored re-
sistance

8.3.1 Variables
A PS Area of PT in the tension zone

AS Area of reinforcement in the tension zone

A slab Tributary area of the slab

a Depth of the equivalent stress block in accordance with AASHTO


LRFD 5.7.3.2.2.

b slab Effective flange width = horizontal width of slab tributary area,


measured from out to out

b webeq Thickness of the beam web

dP Distance from the extreme compression fiber to the centroid of the


prestressing tendons in the tension zone

dS Distance from the extreme compression fiber to the centroid of the


rebar in the tension zone

f ps Average stress in prestressing steel (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-


1)

f pu Specified tensile strength of prestressing steel (area weighted aver-


age of all tendons in the tensile zone)

f py Yield tensile strength of prestressing steel (area weighted average


of all tendons in the tensile zone)

fy Yield strength of rebar

8 - 16 Flexure Design
Chapter 8 - Design Precast Concrete Girder Bridges

k PT material constant (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-2)

Mn Nominal flexural resistance

Mr Factored flexural resistance

t slabeq Thickness of the composite slab

𝛼𝛼1 Stress block factor, as specified in AASHTO LRFD 2015 Interim Sec-
tion 5.7.2.2.

β1 Stress block factor, as specified in AASHTO LRFD Section 5.7.2.2

φ Resistance factor for flexure

8.3.2 Design Process


The derivation of the moment resistance of the section is based on the ap-
proximate stress distribution specified in AASHTO LRFD Article 5.7.2.2. The
natural relationship between concrete stress and strain is considered satisfied
by an equivalent rectangular concrete compressive stress block of 𝛼𝛼1 𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ over
a zone bounded by the edges of the cross-section and a straight line located
parallel to the neutral axis at the distance a = β 1 c from the extreme compres-
sion fiber. If the AASHTO LRFD 2015 interim is selected the factor 𝛼𝛼1 is
taken as 0.85 for specified compressive strengths not exceeding 10.0 ksi. For
specified concrete compressive strengths exceeding 10.0ksi, 𝛼𝛼1 is reduced at
rate of 0.02 for each 1.0ksi of strength in excess of 10.0ksi, except that 𝛼𝛼1 is
not taken less than 0.75. For AASHTO LRFD no interim the 𝛼𝛼1 is always taken
as 0.85 independent of concrete compressive strength. The distance c is meas-
ured perpendicular to the neutral axis. The factor β 1 is taken as 0.85 for con-
crete strengths not exceeding 4.0 ksi. For concrete strengths exceeding 4.0
ksi, β 1 is reduced at a rate of 0.05 for each 1.0 ksi of strength in excess of 4.0
ksi, except that β 1 is not to be taken to be less than 0.65.

The flexural resistance is determined in accordance with AASHTO LRFD


paragraph 5.7.3.2. The resistance is evaluated only for bending about hori-
zontal axis 3. Separate capacity is calculated for positive and negative mo-
ment. The capacity is based on bonded tendons and mild steel located in the

Flexure Design 8 - 17
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

tension zone as defined in the Bridge Object. Tendons and mild steel rein-
forcement located in the compression zone are not considered. It is assumed
that all defined tendons in a section, stressed or not, have f pe (effective stress
after loses) larger than 0.5 f pu (specified tensile strength). If a certain tendon
should not be considered for the flexural capacity calculation, its area must
be set to zero.

The section properties are calculated for the section before skew, grade, and
superelevation are applied. This is consistent with the demands being re-
ported in the section local axis. It is assumed that the effective width of the
flange (slab) in compression is equal to the width of the slab.

8.3.3 Algorithms
At each section:

 All section properties and demands are converted from CSiBridge model
units to N, mm.

 The 𝛼𝛼1 stress block factor is evaluated in accordance with AASHTO LRFD
5.7.2.2 based on section f ′c

For AASHTO LRFD 2015 Interim


𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ −10
– 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ > 10.0𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘𝑘, 𝑡𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝛼𝛼 1 = 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 �0.85 − 0.02; 0.75�
1.0

– else 𝛼𝛼1 = 0.85

For AASHTO LRFD No Interim

– 𝛼𝛼1 = 0.85

 The β1 stress block factor is evaluated in accordance with AASHTO LRFD


5.7.2.2 based on section fc′.

 f ′ − 28 
– If f ′c > 28 MPa, then
= β1 max  0.85 − c 0.05; 0.65  ;
 7 

else β 1 = 0.85.

8 - 18 Flexure Design
Chapter 8 - Design Precast Concrete Girder Bridges

 The tendon and rebar location, area and material are read. Only bonded
tendons are processed; unbonded tendons are ignored.

Tendons and rebar are split into two groups depending on what sign of mo-
ment they resistnegative or positive. A tendon or rebar is considered to
resist a positive moment when it is located outside of the top fiber compres-
sion stress block, and it is considered to resist a negative moment when it
is located outside of the bottom fiber compression stress block. The com-
pression stress block extends over a zone bounded by the edges of the cross-
section and a straight line located parallel to the neutral axis at the distance
a = β 1 c from the extreme compression fiber. The distance c is measured
perpendicular to the neutral axis.

For each tendon group, an area weighted average of the following values is
determined:

– sum of the tendon areas, A PS


– center of gravity of the tendons, d P
– specified tensile strength of prestressing steel f pu

– constant k (eq. 5.7.3.1.1-2)

 f py 
=k 2  1.04 − 
 f pu 

For each rebar group the following values are determined:

– sum of tension rebar areas, A s

– distance from the extreme compression fiber to the centroid of the ten-
sion rebar, d s

 Positive moment resistance – First it is assumed that the equivalent com-


pression stress block is within the top slab. Distance c between the neutral
axis and the compressive face is calculated in accordance with (AASHTO
LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-4)

Flexure Design 8 - 19
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

APS f PU + As f s
c=
f pu
α1 f ′cβ1bslab + kAPS
dp

 The distance c is compared against requirement of Section 5.7.2.1 to verify


if stress in mild reinforcement fs can be taken as equal to fy. The limit on
ratio c/ds is calculated depending on what kind of code and its interim are
specified in the Bridge Design Preferences form as shown in the table be-
low:

Code AASHTO LRFD 2012 AASHTO LRFD 2012


No Interims with 2013 Interims or
later
𝑐𝑐 0.003
Ratio limit ≤ 0.6
𝑑𝑑𝑠𝑠
0.003 + 𝜀𝜀𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐

where the compression control strain limit 𝜀𝜀𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 is per AASHTO LRFD 2013
Interims table C5.7.2.1-1

When the limit is not satisfied the stress in mild reinforcement f s is re-
duced to satisfy the requirement of Section 5.7.2.1.The distance c is com-
pared to the slab thickness. If the distance to the neutral axis c is larger
than the composite slab thickness, the distance c is re-evaluated. For this
calculation, the beam flange width and area are converted to their equiva-
lents in slab concrete by multiplying the beam flange width by the modu-
lar ratio between the precast girder concrete and the slab concrete. The
web width in the equation for c is substituted for the effective converted
girder flange width. The distance c is recalculated in accordance with
(AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-3).

APS f PU + As f s − α1 f ′c ( bslab − bwebeq ) tslabeq


c=
f pu
α1 f ′c β1bwebeq + kAPS
y pt

If the calculated value of c exceeds the sum of the deck thickness and the
equivalent precast girder flange thickness, the program assumes the neutral
axis is below the flange of the precast girder and recalculates c. The term

8 - 20 Flexure Design
Chapter 8 - Design Precast Concrete Girder Bridges

∝1 𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ (𝑏𝑏 − 𝑏𝑏𝑤𝑤 ) in the calculation is broken into two terms, one refers to the
contribution of the deck to the composite section flange and the second
refers to the contribution of the precast girder flange to the composite
girder flange.

 Average stress in prestressing steel fps is calculated in accordance with


AASHTO LRFD 5.7.3.1.1-1.

 c 
=
fPS fPU  1 − k 
 dp 

 Nominal flexural resistance Mn is calculated in accordance with AASHTO


LRFD 5.7.3.2.2-1.

– If the section is a T-section, then

 cβ   cβ   cβ tslabeq 
M n APS f PS  d p − 1  + AS f s  d s − 1  + α1 f ′c ( bslab − bwebeq ) tslabeq  1 −
= ;
 2   2   2 2 
else
 cβ   cβ 
= M n APS f PS  d p − 1  + AS f s  d s − 1 
 2   2 
 Factored flexural resistance is obtained by multiplying Mn by φ.

Mr = ϕM n

 Extreme moment M3 demands are found from the specified demand sets
and the controlling demand set name is recorded.

The process for evaluating negative moment resistance is analogous, except


that calculation of positive moment resistance is not applicable.

Flexure Design 8 - 21
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

8.3.4 Flexure Capacity Design Example

Figure 8-3 Flexure capacity design example deck section

Girder spacing: 9'-8"

Girder type: AASHTO Type VI Girders, 72 inches deep, 42-inch-wide top


flange, and 28-inch-wide bottom flange (AASHTO 28/72 Girders)

Concrete deck: 8 inches thick, haunch thickness assumed = 0

8 - 22 Flexure Design
Chapter 8 - Design Precast Concrete Girder Bridges

Figure 8-4 Flexure capacity design example beam section

Materials

Concrete strength
Prestressed girders 28-day strength, fc′ = 6 ksi,
Girder final elastic modulus, E c = 4,696 ksi
Deck slab = 4.0 ksi,
Deck slab elastic modulus, E s = 3,834 ksi
Reinforcing steel yield strength, f y = 60 ksi
Prestressing strands 0.5-inch-diameter low relaxation strands Grade
270

Flexure Design 8 - 23
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Strand area, A ps = 0.153 in2


Steel yield strength, f py = 243 ksi
Steel ultimate strength, f pu = 270 ksi
Prestressing steel modulus, E p = 28,500 ksi

Basic beam section properties

Depth = 72 in.
Thickness of web = 8 in.
Area, A g = 1,085 in2
Moment of inertia, I g = 733,320 in4
N.A. to top, y t = 35.62 in.
N.A. to bottom, y b = 36.38 in.
P/S force eccentricity e = 31.380 in.

In accordance with AASHTO LRFD paragraph 4.6.2.6, the effective


flange width of the concrete deck slab is taken as the tributary width.

For the interior beam, the b slab = 9'-8" = 116 in.

Tendons are split into two groups depending on which sign of moment they
resistnegative or positive. A tendon is considered to resist a positive mo-
ment when it is located outside of the top fiber compression stress block and
is considered to resist a negative moment when it is located outside of the
bottom
fiber compression stress block. The compression stress block extends over a
zone bounded by the edges of the cross-section and a straight line located
parallel to the neutral axis at the distance a = β 1 c from the extreme compres-
sion fiber. The distance c is measured perpendicular to the neutral axis.

 For each tendon group, an area weighted average of the following values is
determined:

– sum of tendon areas


APTbottom =
44 × 0.153 =
6.732 in 2
Value reported by CSiBridge = 6.732 in2

8 - 24 Flexure Design
Chapter 8 - Design Precast Concrete Girder Bridges

– distance from center of gravity of tendons to extreme compression fiber


12 × 2 + 12 × 4 + 10 × 6 + 6 × 8 + 4 × 10
yPTbottom = ( 72 + 8 ) − = 75 in
12 + 12 + 10 + 6 + 4

– specified tensile strength of prestressing steel f pu = 270 kip


Value reported by CSiBridge = 270 kip

– constant k (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-2)


 f py   243 
k= 2  1.04 − = 2  1.04 − = 0.28
 f pu   270 
Value reported by CSiBridge = 0.28

β1 stress block factor is evaluated in accordance with AASHTO LRFD


5.7.2.2 based on the composite slab f ′c

β 1 shall be taken as 0.85 for concrete strength not exceeding 4.0 ksi. If
f ′c > 4 ksi, then β 1 shall be reduced at a rate of 0.05 for each 1.0 ksi of
strength in excess of 4.0 ksi. Since fc′ = 4 ksi, β 1 = 0.85.
Value calculated by CSiBridge = 0.85 (not reported)

 The distance c between neutral axis and the compressive face is evaluated
in accordance with AASHTO LRFD 5.7.3.1.1-4.

APTbottom × f pu
c=
f pu
0.85 × f ′c × β1 × bslab + k × APTbottom ×
yPTbottom
6.732 * 270
= = 5.314 in
270
0.85 × 4 × 0.85 × 116 + 0.28 × 6.732 ×
75
Value calculated by CSiBridge = 5.314 in

 The distance c is compared to the composite slab thickness to determine if


the c needs to be re-evaluated to include the precast beam flange in the
equivalent compression block.

Since c = 5.314 in < 8 in, the c is valid.

Flexure Design 8 - 25
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

 Average stress in prestressing steel fps is calculated in accordance with


AASHTO LRFD 5.7.3.1.1-1.

 c   5.314 
f ps = f pu  1 − k  = 270 ×  1 − 0.28 ×  = 264.64 ksi
 yPTbottom   75 
Value reported by CSiBridge = 264.643 ksi

 Nominal flexural resistance Mn is calculated in accordance with AASHTO


LRFD 5.7.3.2.2-1.

Since the section is rectangular,

 cβ   5.314 × 0.85 
M n = APTbottom f ps  yPTbottom − 1 = 6.732 × 264.64 ×  75 − 
 2   2 
= 129593.17
= 12 10 799.4 kip-ft
Value calculated by CSiBridge = 107 99 kip-ft (not reported)

 Factored flexural resistance is obtained by multiplying Mn by φ.

Mr =
φM n =
0.9 × 10 799.4 =
9719.5 kip-ft
Value reported by CSiBridge = 9719.5 kip-ft (116633.5 kip-in) )

8.4 Principal Stress Design

8.4.1 Capacity Parameters


PhiC Resistance Factor; default value = 1.0, typical value: 1.0.
The compression and tension limits are multiplied by the
φ C factor.
FactorCom- f’ c multiplier; default value = 0.4; typical values: 0.4 to 0.6.
pLim The f’ c is multiplied by the FactorCompLim to obtain the
compression limit.
FactorTensLim �𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ multiplier; default values = 0.19 (ksi), 0.5(MPa); typ-
ical values: 0 to 0.24 (ksi), 0 to 0.63 (MPa). The �𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐′ is
multiplied by the FactorTensLim to obtain tension limit.

8 - 26 Principal Stress Design


Chapter 8 - Design Precast Concrete Girder Bridges

8.4.2 Demand Parameters


FactorCom- Percentage of the basic unit stress for compression service
pLim design; default value = 1.0; typical values 1.0 to 1.5. The
demand compressive stresses are divided by the Factor-
CompLim factor. This way the controlling stress can be
selected and compared against one compression limit
FactorTensLim Percentage of the basic unit stress for tension service de-
sign; default value = 1.0; typical values 1.0 to 1.5. The de-
mand tensile stresses are divided by the FactorCompLim
factor. This way the controlling stress can be selected and
compared against one tension limit.

8.4.3 Algorithm
The stresses are evaluated for each precast beam at three points along the
beam web – at the bottom of the web (where the web enters the bottom
flange), at the top of the web (where the web enters the top flange), and at
the neutral axis of the beam. The stresses assume linear distribution and take
into account axial (P), both bending moments (M2 and M3), and vertical shear
(V2). Torsion is ignored. Since the beam demands are read directly from the
area or solid model, the principal stress check is not available for spine models.
Also, since use of live load distribution factors is not supported for this design
request, all live load lanes that fit on the deck as specified in the design code
shall be defined and loaded in the model.

The stresses are evaluated for each demand set. If the demand set contains live
load, CSiBridge positions the load to capture extreme stress at each of the
evaluation points.

Extremes are found for each point and the controlling demand set name is
recorded.

The stress limits are evaluated by applying the Capacity Parameters.

Principal Stress Design 8 - 27


Chapter 9
Design Steel I-Beam Bridge with Composite Slab

This chapter describes the algorithms CSiBridge applies when designing


steel I-beam with composite slab superstructures in accordance with, the
AASHTO LRFD 2014 (AASHTO LRFD).

9.1 Section Properties


9.1.1 Yield Moments
9.1.1.1 Composite Section in Positive Flexure
The positive yield moment, My, is determined by the program in accordance
with AASHTO LRFD Section D6.2.2 using the following user-defined input,
which is part of the Design Request (see Chapter 4 for more information
about Design Request).

Mdnc = The user specifies in the Design Request the name of the combo that
represents the moment caused by the factored permanent load ap-
plied before the concrete deck has hardened or is made composite.

Mdc = The user specifies in the Design Request the name of the combo that
represents the moment caused by the remainder of the factored
permanent load (applied to the composite section).

The program solves for MAD from the following equation,

9-1
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

M dnc M dc M AD
Fyt = + + (AASHTO LRFD D6.2.2-1)
S NC SLT SST

and then calculates yield moment based on the following equation

M y = M dnc + M dc + M AD (AASHTO LRFD D6.2.2-2)

where

SNC = Noncomposite section modulus (in.3)


SLT = Long-term composite section modulus (in.3)
SST = Short-term composite section modulus (in.3)

My is taken as the lesser value calculated for the compression flange,


Myc, or the tension flange, Myt. The positive My is calculated only once
based on Mdnc and Mdc demands specified by the user in the Design
Request. It should be noted that the My calculated in the procedure
described here is used by the program only to determine Mnpos for a
compact section in positive bending in a continuous span, where the
nominal flexural resistance may be controlled by My in accordance
with (AASHTO LRFD eq. 6.10.7.1.2-3).

M n ≤ 1.3 Rh M y

9.1.1.2 Composite Section in Negative Flexure


For composite sections in negative flexure, the procedure described for posi-
tive yield moment is followed, except that the composite section for both
short-term and long-term moments consists of the steel section and the lon-
gitudinal reinforcement within the tributary width of the concrete deck.
Thus, SST and SLT are the same value. Also, Myt is taken with respect to either
the tension flange or the longitudinal reinforcement, whichever yields first.

The negative My is calculated only once based on the Mdnc and Mdc demands
specified by the user in the Design Request. It should be noted that the My
calculated in the procedure described here is used by the program solely to
determine the limiting slenderness ratio for a compact web corresponding
to 2Dcp /tw in (AASHTO LRFD eq. A6.2.1-2).

9-2 Section Properties


Chapter 9 - Design Steel I-Beam Bridge with Composite Slab

E
Fyc  Dcp 
=λ pw( Dcp ) ≤ λ rw 
2  (AASHTO LRFD A6.2.1-2)
 Mp   Dc 
 0.54 − 0.09 
 Rh M y 

and web plastification factors in (AASHTO LRFD eqs. A.6.2.2-4 and A6.2.2-
5).

  Rh M yc   λ w − λ pw( Dc )  M p Mp
R pc = 1 −  1 −    ≤
  M yc M yc
  Mp   λ rw − λ pw( Dc ) 
(AASHTO LRFD A.6.2.2-4)

  Rh M yt   λ w − λ pw( Dc )  M p M p
R pt = 1 −  1 −    ≤
  M yt M yt
  Mp   λ rw − λ pw( Dc ) 
(AASHTO LRFD A6.2.2-5)

9.1.2 Plastic Moments


9.1.2.1 Composite Section in Positive Flexure
The positive plastic moment, Mp, is calculated as the moment of the plastic
forces about the plastic neutral axis. Plastic forces in the steel portions of a
cross-section are calculated using the yield strengths of the flanges, the web,
and reinforcing steel, as appropriate. Plastic forces in the concrete portions
of the cross-section that are in compression are based on a rectangular stress
block with the magnitude of the compressive stress equal to 0.85 fc′. Con-
crete in tension is neglected. The position of the plastic neutral axis is de-
termined by the equilibrium condition that there is no net axial force. In
calculating Mp for positive moment, the contribution of the rebar in the deck is
ignored.

The plastic moment of a composite section in positive flexure is determined


by:

• Calculating the element forces and using them to determine if the plastic
neutral axis is in the web, top flange, or concrete deck

Section Properties 9-3


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

• Calculating the location of the plastic neutral axis within the element de-
termined in the first step

• Calculating Mp.

Equations for the various potential locations of the plastic neutral axis
(PNA) are given in Table 9-1.

Table 9-1 Calculation of PNA and M p for Sections in Positive Flexure

Case PNA Condition Y and M p


 D   P − Pc − Ps − Prt − Prb 
= Y   t + 1
 
2 P 
P t + Pw ≥ w
I In Web
w  2 
P c + P s + P rb + P n Y + ( D − Y )  + [ Ps ds + Prt drt + Prb d rb + Pc dc + Pt dt ]
P 2
=
M p
2D

 t   P + Pt − Ps − Prt − Prb 
= Y  c  w + 1
 2  Pc 
In Top P t + Pw + P c ≥
II
Y + ( tc − Y )  + [ Ps ds + Pn dn + Prb d rb + Pw dw + Pt dt ]
c  2
Flange Ps + Prb + Pn P 2
=
M
2t c 
p

Concrete  P + Pw + Pt − Prt − Prb 


Pt + Pw + Pc ≥ Y = ( ts )  c 
Deck  Ps 
III  crb 
Below   Ps + Prb + Pn  Y 2 Ps 
Prb  t2  M=p   + [ Prt drt + Prb d rb + Pc dc + Pw dw + Pt dt ]
 2t s 

Concrete Pt + Pw + Pc + Prb ≥ Y = crb


IV Deck at  crb   Y 2 Ps 
  Ps + Pn M=   + [ Prt drt + Pc dc + Pw dw + Pt dt ]
Prb  ts 
p
 2t s 

Concrete
 P + Pc + Pw + Pt − Prt 
Deck Pt + Pw + Pc + Prb ≥ Y = ( t s )  rb 
Above  Ps 
V  crt 
Prb and   Ps + Pn  Y Ps 
2

Below  ts  M=p   + [ Prt drt + Prb drb + Pc dc + Pw dw + Pt dt ]


 2t s 
Prt

9-4 Section Properties


Chapter 9 - Design Steel I-Beam Bridge with Composite Slab

Table 9-1 Calculation of PNA and M p for Sections in Positive Flexure

Case PNA Condition Y and M p


Concrete Pt + Pw + Pc + Prb + Pn ≥ Y = crt
VI Deck at  crt   Y 2 Ps 
  Ps M=   + [ Prb drb + Pc dc + Pw dw + Pt dt ]
Prt  ts 
p
 2t s 

 P + Pc + Pw + Pt + Prt 
Concrete Pt + Pw + Pc + Prb + Prt < Y = ( t s )  rb 
Deck  Ps 
VII  crt 
Above   Ps  Y 2 Ps 
Prt  ts  M=p   + [ Prt drt + Prb drb + Pc dc + Pw dw + Pt dt ]
 2t s 

Next the section is checked for ductility requirement in accordance with


equation 6.10.7.3. In checking the ductility per 6.10.7.3, the depth of the
haunch is neglected.

Dp ≤ 0.42Dt

where Dp is the distance from the top of the concrete deck to the neutral ax-
is of the composite section at the plastic moment, and Dt is the total depth
of the composite section. At the section where the ductility requirement is
not satisfied, the plastic moment of a composite section in positive flexure is
set to zero.

bs Arb Crt
Art
Prt
ts Ps Crb Y
Prb PNA
PNA
bc Pc
tc Y Y
Pw PNA
D tw
tt Pt
CASE I CASE II CASES III-VII
bt

Figure 9-1 Plastic Neutral Axis Cases -- Positive Flexure

Section Properties 9-5


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

9.1.2.2 Composite Section in Negative Flexure


The plastic moment of a composite section in negative flexure is calculated
by an analogous procedure. Equations for the two cases most likely to occur
in practice are given in Table 9-2. The plastic moment of a noncomposite
section is calculated by eliminating the terms pertaining to the concrete
deck and longitudinal reinforcement from the equations in Tables 8-1 and
8-2 for composite sections.

Table 9-2 Calculation of PNA and Mp for Sections in Negative Flexure

Case PNA Condition Y and Mp

 D   P − Pt − Prt − Prb 
= Y   c + 1
 2  Pw 
I In Web Pc + Pw ≥ Pt + Prb + Pn
Pw  2 ( 
Y + D − Y )  + [ Pn dn + Prb drb + Pt dt + Pd
l l]
2
=
M p
2D

 t   P − Pc − Prt − Prb 
= Y  l  w + 1
In Top  2  Pt 
II Pc + Pw + Pt ≥ Prb + Pn
Flange
Y + ( tl − Y )  + [ Pn dn + Prb drb + Pw dw + Pc dc ]
Pt  2 2

=
M
2tl 
p

Art Arb
Prt
ts Prb
Pt PNA
bc Y
tt Y
Pw PNA
D tw

tc Pc
bc CASE I CASE II
CASE V

9-6 Section Properties


Chapter 9 - Design Steel I-Beam Bridge with Composite Slab

Figure 9-2 Plastic Neutral Axis Cases -- Negative Flexure


in which

Prt = Fyrt Art


Ps = 0.85 fc′ bsts
Prb = Fyrb Arb
Pc = Fycbctc
Pw = Fyw Dtw
Pt = Fyt bttt

In the equations for Mp given in Tables 8-1 and 8-2, d is the distance from
an element force to the plastic neutral axis. Element forces act at (a) mid-
thickness for the flanges and the concrete deck, (b) mid-depth of the web,
and (c) center of reinforcement. All element forces, dimensions, and dis-
tances are taken as positive. The conditions are checked in the order listed
in Tables 8-1 and 8-2.

9.1.3 Section Classification and Factors


9.1.3.1 Compact or Non-Compact − Positive Flexure
The program determines if the section can be qualified as compact based on
the following criteria:

 the specified minimum yield strengths of the flanges do not exceed 70.0
ksi,

 the web satisfies the requirement of AASHTO LRFD Article (6.10.2.1.1),

D
≤ 150
tw

 the section satisfies the web slenderness limit,

2 Dcp E
≤ 3.76 . (AASHTO LRFD 6.10.6.2.2-1)
tw Fyc

Section Properties 9-7


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

The program does not verify if the composite section is kinked (chorded)
continuous or horizontally curved.

9.1.3.2 Design in Accordance with Appendix A


The program determines if a section qualifies to be designed using Appendix
A of the AASHTO LRFD Edition based on the following criteria:

• the Design Request Parameter “Use Appendix A?” is set to Yes (see Chap-
ter 4 for more information about setting parameters in the Design Re-
quest),

• the specified minimum yield strengths of the flanges do not exceed 70.0
ksi,

• the web satisfies the noncompact slenderness limit,

2 Dc E
< 5.7 (AASHTO LRFD 6.10.6.2.3-1)
tw Fyc

• the flanges satisfy the following ratio,

I yc
≥ 0.3. (AASHTO LRFD 6.10.6.2.3-2)
I yt

The program does not verify if the composite section is kinked (chorded)
continuous or horizontally curved.

9.1.3.3 Hybrid Factor Rh − Composite Section Positive Flexure


For rolled shapes, homogenous built-up sections, and built-up sections with
a higher-strength steel in the web than in both flanges, Rh is taken as 1.0.
Otherwise the hybrid factor is taken as:

12 + β ( 3ρ − ρ3 )
Rh = (AASHTO LRFD 6.10.1.10.1-1)
12 + 2β

where

ρ =the smaller of Fyw fn and 1.0

9-8 Section Properties


Chapter 9 - Design Steel I-Beam Bridge with Composite Slab

2 Dn t w
β= (AASHTO LRFD 6.10.1.10.1-2)
A fn

Afn = bottom flange area

Dn = the distance from the elastic neutral axis of the cross-section


to the inside face of bottom flange

Fn = fy of the bottom flange

9.1.3.4 Hybrid Factor Rh − Composite Section Negative Flexure


For rolled shapes, homogenous built-up sections, and built-up sections with
a higher-strength steel in the web than in both flanges, Rh is taken as 1.0.
Otherwise the hybrid factor is taken as:

12 + β ( 3ρ − ρ3 )
Rh = (AASHTO LRFD 6.10.1.10.1-1)
12 + 2β

where

2 Dn t w
β= (AASHTO LRFD 6.10.1.10.1-2)
A fn

ρ =the smaller of Fyw fn and 1.0

Afn = Flange area on the side of the neutral axis corresponding to


Dn. If the top flange controls, then the area of longitudinal
rebar in the slab is included in calculating Afn.

Dn = The larger of the distances from the elastic neutral axis of


the cross-section to the inside face of either flange. For sec-
tions where the neutral axis is at the mid-depth of the web,
this distance is from the neutral axis to the inside face of the
flange on the side of the neutral axis where yielding occurs
first.

Fn = fy of the controlling flange. When the top flange controls,


then Fn is equal to the largest of the minimum specified

Section Properties 9-9


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

yield strengths of the top flange or the longitudinal rebar in


the slab.

9.1.3.5 Hybrid Factor Rh – Non Composite Section


For rolled shapes, homogenous built-up sections, and built-up sections with
a higher-strength steel in the web than in both flanges, Rh is taken as 1.0.
Otherwise the hybrid factor is taken as:

12 + β ( 3ρ − ρ3 )
Rh = (AASHTO LRFD 6.10.1.10.1-1)
12 + 2β

where

ρ =the smaller of Fyw fn and 1.0

2 Dn t w
β= (AASHTO LRFD 6.10.1.10.1-2)
A fn

Afn = Flange area on the side of the neutral axis corresponding to


Dn .

Dn = The larger of the distances from the elastic neutral axis of


the cross-section to the inside face of either flange. For sec-
tions where the neutral axis is at the mid-depth of the web,
this distance is from the neutral axis to the inside face of the
flange on the side of the neutral axis where yielding occurs
first.

Fn = fy of the controlling flange.

9.1.3.6 Web Load-Shedding Factor Rb


When checking constructability in accordance with the provisions of
AASHTO LRFD Article 6.10.2.1 or for composite sections in positive flex-
ure, the Rb factor is taken as equal to 1.0. For composite sections in negative
flexure, the Rb factor is taken as:

 awc  2 Dc 
Rb =
1−   − λrw  ≤ 1.0
 1200 + 300 awc   t w 

9 - 10 Section Properties
Chapter 9 - Design Steel I-Beam Bridge with Composite Slab

(AASHTO LRFD 6.10.1.10.2)

where

E
λ rw =
5.7 (AASHTO LRFD 6.10.1.10.2-4)
Fyc

2 Dc t w
awc = (AASHTO LRFD 2008 6.10.1.10.2-5)
b fc t fc

When the user specifies the Design Request parameter “Do webs have lon-
gitudinal stiffeners?” as yes, the Rb factor is set to 1.0 (see Chapter 4 for
more information about specifying Design Request parameters).

9.1.3.7 Unbraced Length Lb and Section Transitions


The program assumes that the top flange is continuously braced for all De-
sign Requests, except for Constructability. For more information about
flange lateral bracing in a Constructability Design Request, see Section 8.6
of this manual.

The unbraced length Lb for the bottom flange is equal to the distance be-
tween the nearest downstation and upstation qualifying cross diaphragms or
span support as defined in the Bridge Object. Some of the diaphragm types
available in CSiBridge may not necessarily provide restraint to the bottom
flange. The program assumes that the following diaphragm qualifies as
providing lateral restraint to the bottom flange: single beam, all types of
chords and braces except V braces without bottom beams.

For unbraced lengths where the member is nonprismatic, the lateral tor-
sional buckling resistance of the compression flange at each section within
the unbraced length is taken as the smallest resistance within the unbraced
length under consideration and the moment gradient modifier Cb is taken
as 1.0.

For unbraced lengths containing a transition to a smaller section at a dis-


tance less than or equal to 20% of the unbraced length from a brace point,
the lateral torsional buckling resistance is determined assuming the transi-
tion to the smaller section does not exist provided that the lateral moment

Section Properties 9 - 11
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

of inertia of the flange of the smaller section is equal to or larger than 0.5
times the corresponding value in the larger section. The algorithm does not
distinguish at which brace point the moment demand is smaller and applies
the exception at both brace points. It is the responsibility of the user to pay
special attention to the section transition within the 20% of the unbraced
length from the brace point and to follow the guidelines in AASHTO LRFD
C6.10.8.2.3.

For this algorithm to be effective, it is necessary to have bridge section cuts


at each nonprismatic girder-section transition. This can be assured by using
the local section cuts feature when updating the linked model to create ad-
ditional local section cuts for each girder of steel I-girder bridge sections.
Such girder-only section cuts will be created at changes in the steel I-girder
section, at staggered diaphragms (cross frames), and at splice locations
wherever a full-width section cut does not exist.

9.2 Demand Sets


Demand Set combos (at least one is required) are user-defined combinations
based on LRFD combinations (see Chapter 4 for more information about
specifying Demand Sets). The demands from all specified demand combos
are enveloped and used to calculate D/C ratios. The way the demands are
used depends on if the design parameter "Use Stage Analysis?” is set to Yes
or No.

If “Use Stage Analysis? = Yes,” the program reads the stresses on beams and
slabs directly from the section cut results. The program assumes that the ef-
fects of the staging of loads applied to non-composite versus composite sec-
tions, as well as the concrete slab material time dependent properties, were
captured by using the Nonlinear Staged Construction load case available in
CSiBridge.

Note that the Design Request for staged constructability check (Steel-I
Comp Construct Stgd) allows only Nonlinear Staged Construction load cases
to be used as Demand Sets.

If “Use Stage Analysis? = No,” the program decomposes load cases present in
every demand set combo to three Bridge Design Action categories: non-

9 - 12 Demand Sets
Chapter 9 - Design Steel I-Beam Bridge with Composite Slab

composite, composite long term, and composite short term. The program
uses the load case Bridge Design Action parameter to assign the load cases to
the appropriate categories. A default Bridge Design Action parameter is as-
signed to a load case based on its Design Type. However, the parameter can
be overwritten: click the Analysis > Load Cases > {Type} > New command to
display the Load Case Data – {Type} form; click the Design button next to
the Load case type dropdown list; under the heading Bridge Design Action,
select the User Defined option and select a value from the list. The assigned
Bridge Designed Action values are handled by the program in the following
manner:

Table 9-3 Bridge Design Action

Bridge Design Action Value Bridge Design Action Category Used in


Specified by the User the Design Algorithm
Non-Composite Non-Composite
Long-Term Composite Long-Term Composite
Short-Term Composite Short-Term Composite
Staged Non-Composite
Other Non-Composite

9.2.1 Demand Flange Stresses fbu and ff


Evaluation of the flange stress, fbu, calculated without consideration of
flange lateral bending is dependent on setting the Design Request parameter
“Use Stage Analysis?”

If the “Use Stage Analysis? = No,” then

P M NC M LTC M STC
fbu = + + +
Acomp Ssteel SLTC SSTC

where MNC is the demand moment on the non-composite section, MLTC is


the demand moment on the long-term composite section, and MSTC is the
demand moment on the short-term composite section.

Demand Sets 9 - 13
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

The short-term section modulus for positive moment is calculated by trans-


forming the concrete deck using the steel-to-concrete modular ratio. The
modular ratio (n) is calculated as a decimal number expressed as n=Es/Ec and
used without rounding. The long-term section modulus for positive moment is
calculated using a modular ratio factored by n, where n is specified in the
Design Parameter as the “Modular ratio long-term multiplier.” The effect of
compression reinforcement is ignored. For negative moment, the concrete
deck is assumed cracked and is not included in the section modulus calcula-
tions while tension reinforcement is accounted for.

If “Use Stage Analysis? = Yes,” then the fbu stresses on each flange are read
directly from the section cut results. The program assumes that the effects
of the staging of loads applied to non-composite versus composite sections,
as well as the concrete slab material time dependent properties, were cap-
tured by using the Nonlinear Staged Construction load case available in
CSiBridge.

In the Strength Design Check, the program verifies the sign of the stress in
the composite slab, and if stress is positive (tension), the program assumes
that the entire section cut demand moment is carried by the steel section
only. This is to reflect the fact that the concrete in the composite slab is
cracked and does not contribute to the resistance of the section. Flange
stress ff , used in the Service Design Check, is evaluated in the same manner
as stress fbu, with one exception. When the Steel Service Design Request pa-
rameter “Does concrete slab resist tension?” is set to Yes, the program uses
section properties based on a transformed section that assumes the concrete
slab to be fully effective in both tension and compression.

In the Constructability checks, the program proceeds based on the status of


the concrete slab. When no slab is present or the slab is non-composite, the
fbu stresses on each flange are read directly from the section cut results.
When the slab status is composite, the program verifies the sign of the stress
in the composite slab, and if stress is positive (tension), the program assumes
that the entire section cut demand moment is carried by the steel section
only. This is to reflect the fact that the concrete in the composite slab is
cracked and does not contribute to the resistance of the section.

9 - 14 Demand Sets
Chapter 9 - Design Steel I-Beam Bridge with Composite Slab

9.2.2 Demand Flange Lateral Bending Stress fl


The flange lateral bending stress fl is evaluated only when all of the follow-
ing conditions are met:

 “Steel Girders” has been selected for the deck section type (Components >
Superstructure Item > Deck Sections command) and the Girder Modeling
In Area Object Models – Model Girders Using Area Objects option is set to
“Yes” on the Define Bridge Section Data – Steel Girder form.

 The bridge object is modeled using Area Objects. This option can be set
using the Bridge > Update command to display the “Update Bridge Struc-
tural Model“ form; then select the Update as Area Object Model option.

 Set the Live Load Distribution to Girders method to “Use Forces Directly
from CSiBridge” on the Bridge Design Request – Superstructure – {Code}
form, which displays when the Design/Rating > Superstructure Design >
Design Requests command is used (see Chapter 3 for more information
about Live Load Distribution). Since there is no live load used in the Con-
structability design, request this setting does not apply in that case.

In all other cases, the flange lateral bending stress is set to zero. The fl
stresses on each flange are read directly from the section cut results.

9.2.3 Depth of the Web in Compression


For composite sections in positive flexure, the depth of the web in compres-
sion is computed using the following equation:

 fc 
=Dc   d − t fc ≥ 0 (AASHTO LRFD D6.3-1)
 fc + ft 

Demand Sets 9 - 15
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Figure 9-3 Web in Compression – Positive Flexure


where

fc = Sum of the compression-flange stresses caused by the different loads,


i.e., DC1, the permanent load acting on the noncomposite section; DC2,
the permanent load acting on the long-term composite section; DW, the
wearing surface load; and LL+IM; acting on their respective sections. fc
is taken as negative when the stress is in compression. Flange lateral
bending is disregarded in this calculation.

ft = Sum of the tension-flange stresses caused by the different loads. Flange


lateral bending is disregarded in this calculation.

For composite sections in negative flexure, Dc is computed for the section


consisting of the steel girder plus the longitudinal reinforcement, with the
exception of the following. For composite sections in negative flexure at the
Service Design Check Request where the concrete deck is considered effec-
tive in tension for computing flexural stresses on the composite section (De-
sign Parameter “Does concrete slab resist tension?” = Yes), Dc is computed
from AASHTO LRFD Eq. D 6.3.1-1. For this case, the stresses fc and ft are
switched, the signs shown in the stress diagram are reversed, tfc is the thick-
ness of the bottom flange, and Dc instead extends from the neutral axis
down to the top of the bottom flange.

9.2.4 Moment Gradient Modifier Cb


When the design request parameter ‘Method for determining moment gra-
dient factor Cb‘ is set to ‘Program Determined’, then for each demand set the
stresses defined in AASHTO LRFD section 6.10.8.2.3 fmid, f0,f1 and f2 at the
unbraced segment are determined by interpolation of demands at nearest
section cuts. The designer should be aware that live load moments at neigh-
boring section cuts within the unbraced segment are not necessarily con-
trolled by the same load pattern and as a result the moment gradient calcu-
lation may be impacted. The moment gradient modifier Cb is then calculat-
ed as:

9 - 16 Demand Sets
Chapter 9 - Design Steel I-Beam Bridge with Composite Slab

9.3 Strength Design Request


The Strength Design Check calculates at every section cut positive flexural
capacity, negative flexural capacity, and shear capacity. It then compares
the capacities against the envelope of demands specified in the Design Re-
quest.

9.3.1 Flexure
9.3.1.1 Positive Flexure – Compact
The nominal flexural resistance of the section is evaluated as follows:

If Dp ≤ 0.1 Dt, then Mn = Mp; otherwise

 Dp 
=M n M p  1.07 − 0.7  (AASHTO LRFD 6.10.7.1.2-2)
 Dt 

In a continuous span, the nominal flexural resistance of the section is de-


termined as

Mn ≤ 1.3RhMy

where Rh is a hybrid factor for the section in positive flexure.

The demand over capacity ratio is evaluated as

 1 
 Mu + 3 f1S xt f 
DoverC = max  , l 
 φ f Mn 0.6 Fyf
 

Strength Design Request 9 - 17


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

9.3.1.2 Positive Flexure – Non-Compact


Nominal flexural resistance of the top compression flange is taken as:

Fnc = RbRhFyc (AASHTO LRFD 6.10.7.2.2-1)

Nominal flexural resistance of the bottom tension flange is taken as:

Fnt = RhFyt (AASHTO LRFD 6.10.7.2.2-1)

The demand over capacity ratio is evaluated as

 1 
 fbu + 3 f1 fbu f 
DoverC = max  , , l 
 φ f Fnt φ f Fnc 0.6 Fyf
 

9.3.1.3 Negative Flexure in Accordance with Article 6.10.8


The local buckling resistance of the compression flange Fnc(FLB) as specified in
AASHTO LRFD Article 6.10.8.2.2 is taken as:

If λf ≤ λ pf, then Fnc = RbRhFyc. (6.10.8.2.2-1)

Otherwise

  Fyr  λ f − λ pf  
Fnc = 1 −  1 −    Rb Rh Fyc (6.10.8.2.2-2)
  Rh Fyc  λ rf − λ pf  

in which

b fc
λf = (6.10.8.2.2-3)
2t fc

E
λ pf =
0.38 (6.10.8.2.2-4)
Fyc

E
λ rf =0.56 (6.10.8.2.2-5)
Fyr

9 - 18 Strength Design Request


Chapter 9 - Design Steel I-Beam Bridge with Composite Slab

Fyr = Compression-flange stress at the onset of nominal yielding with-


in the cross-section, including residual stress effects, but not in-
cluding compression-flange lateral bending, taken as the smaller
of 0.7Fyc and Fyw, but not less than 0.5 Fyc.

The lateral torsional buckling resistance of the compression flange Fnc(LTB) as


specified in AASHTO LRFD Article (6.10.8.2.3) is taken as follows:

 If Lb ≤ Lp, then Fnc = RbRhFyc. (6.10.8.2.3-1)

 If Lp < Lb ≤ Lr, then

  Fyr  Lb − L p 
Fnc= Cb 1 −  1 −    Rb Rh Fyc ≤ Rb Rh Fyc (6.10.8.2.3-2)
  Rh Fyc  Lr − L p  

 If Lb > Lr, then Fnc = Fcr ≤ RbRhFyc (6.10.8.2.3-3)

in which

E E
Lb = unbraced length, L p = 1.0rt , Lr = πrt
Fyc Fyr

Cb = moment gradient modifier

Cb Rb π2 E
Fcr = 2
(6.10.8.2.3-8)
 Lb 
 r 
 t 

b fc
rt = (6.10.8.2.3-9)
 1 Dc t w 
12  1 +
 3 b fc t fc 

The nominal flexural resistance of the bottom compression flange is taken as


the smaller of the local buckling resistance and the lateral torsional buckling
resistance:

Fnc = min  Fnc( FLB) , Fnc( LTB) 

Strength Design Request 9 - 19


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

The nominal flexural resistance of the top tension flange is taken as:

φ f Rh Fyf (6.10.8.1.3-1)

The demand over capacity ratio is evaluated as

 1 
 fbu + 3 f1 fbu f 
DoverC = max  , , 1 
 φ f Fm φ f Rh Fyf 0.6 Fyc
 

9.3.1.4 Negative Flexure in Accordance with Appendix A6


Sections that satisfy the following requirement qualify as compact web sec-
tions:

2 Dcp
≤ λ pw( Dcp ) (AASHTO LRFD A6.2.1-2)
tw

where

E
Fyc  Dcp 
=
λ pw( Dcp ) 2
≤  (AASHTO LRFD A6.2.1-2)
 Mp   Dc 
 0.54 − 0.09 
 Rh M y 

E
λ rw =
5.7 (AASHTO LRFD A6.2.1-3)
Fyc

Dc = depth of the web in compression in the elastic range

Dcp = depth of the web in compression at the plastic moment

Then web plastification factors are determined as

Mp
R pc = (AASHTO LRFD A6.2.1-4)
M yc

9 - 20 Strength Design Request


Chapter 9 - Design Steel I-Beam Bridge with Composite Slab

Mp
R pt = (AASHTO LRFD A6.2.1-5)
M yt

Sections that do not satisfy the requirement for compact web sections, but
for which the web slenderness satisfies the following requirement:

λ w < λ rw (AASHTO LRFD A6.2.2-1)

where

2D
λw = c (AASHTO LRFD A6.2.2-2)
tw

E
λ rw =
5.7 (AASHTO LRFD A6.2.2-3)
Fyc

The web plastification factors are taken as:

  Rh M yc   λ w − λ pw( Dc )  M p M p
R pc = 1 −  1 −    ≤
  M yc M yc
  Mp   λ tw − λ pw( Dc ) 
(AASHTO LRFD A6.2.2-4)

  Rh M yt   λ w − λ pw( Dc )  M p M p
R pt = 1 −  1 −    ≤
  M yt M yt
 
Mp   λ rw − λ pw( Dc ) 
(AASHTO LRFD A6.2.2-5)

where

 D 
λ pw( Dc ) = λ pw( Dc p )  c  ≤ λ rw (AASHTO LRFD A6.2.2-6)
 Dcp 

The local buckling resistance of the compression flange MncFLB as specified in


AASHTO LRFD Article A6.3.2 is taken as:

 If λ f ≤ λ pf , then M nc = R pc M yc (AASHTO LRFD A6.3.2-1)

Strength Design Request 9 - 21


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

  F S  λ − λ pf 
Otherwise M nc = 1 −  1 − yr xc  f   R pc M yc
  R pc M yc  λ rf − λ pf  
(AASHTO LRFD A6.3.2-2)

in which

b fc
λf = (AASHTO LRFD A6.3.2-3)
2t fc

E
λ pf =
0.38 (AASHTO LRFD A6.3.2-4)
Fyc

Ekc
λ rf =0.95 (AASHTO LRFD A6.3.2-5)
Fyr

4
For built-up sections, kc = (AASHTO LRFD A6.3.2-6)
D
tw

For rolled shapes (eFramePropType =SECTION_I as defined in API function


SapObject.SapModel.PropFrame.GetNameList; PropType argument)

kc = 0.76

The lateral torsional buckling resistance of the compression flange MncLTB as


specified in AASHTO LRFD Article A6.3.3 is taken as Mnc = RpcMyc:

 If Lb ≥ L p , then M nc = R pc M yc . (AASHTO LRFD A6.3.3-1)

 If L p < Lb ≤ Lr , then

  Fyr S xc  Lb − L p 
M nc= Cb 1 −  1 −    R pc M yc ≤ R pc M yc
  R pc M yc  Lr − L p  
(AASHTO LRFD A6.3.3-2)

 If Lb > Lr , then =
M nc Fcr S xc ≤ R pc M yc (AASHTO LRFD A6.3.3-3)

9 - 22 Strength Design Request


Chapter 9 - Design Steel I-Beam Bridge with Composite Slab

in which

Lb = unbraced length,

E
L p = 1.0rt (AASHTO LRFD A6.3.3-4)
Fyc

2
E J  Fyr S xc h 
=Lr 1.95rt 1 + 1 + 6.76  
Fyr S xc h  E J 
(AASHTO LRFD A6.3.3-5)

Cb = moment gradient modifier

C bπ 2 E J
( Lb rt )
2
=Fcr 1 + 0.078 (AASHTO LRFD A6.3.3-8)
( Lb rt )
2
S xc h

3
Dt 3 b fc t ft  t fc  b ft t 3ft  t ft 
J =w +  1 − 0.63 +  1 − 0.63 
3 3  b fc  3  b ft 
(AASHTO LRFD A6.3.3-9)

b fc
rt = (AASHTO LRFD A6.3.3-10)
 1 Dc t w 
12  1 + 
 3 b fc t fc 

The nominal flexural resistance of the bottom compression flange is taken as


the smaller of the local buckling resistance and the lateral torsional buckling
resistance:

M nc = min  M nc( FLB) , M nc( LTB) 

The nominal flexural resistance of the top tension flange is taken as:

φ f R pt M yt

The demand over capacity ratio is evaluated as

Strength Design Request 9 - 23


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

 1 
 Mu + 3 f1S xc Mu f 
DoverC = max  , , 1 
 φ f M nc φ f R pt M yt 0.6 Fyc
 

9.3.1.5 Net Section Fracture


All tension flanges are checked for net section fracture per AASHTO LRFD
section 6.10.1.8. The net area of the tension flange is evaluated as follows:

𝐴𝐴𝑛𝑛 = 𝑟𝑟𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝐴𝐴𝑔𝑔

Where rspl is a ratio defined by the user in the Splice definition (Bridge >
Span Items > Optimize > Splices) command and Ag is the gross flange area.
The demand over capacity ratio is calculated as follows:
𝑓𝑓𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 = 𝐴𝐴
(AASHTO LRFD 6.10.1.8-1)
𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚�𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦 ;0.84𝐴𝐴𝑛𝑛𝑓𝑓𝑢𝑢 �
𝑔𝑔

9.3.1.6 Shear Connectors


The program calculates the total nominal shear force Pnom as specified in
AASHTO LRFD Article 6.10.10.4.2. The user can use the Pnom value to de-
termine the minimum number of shear connectors n as defined in AASHTO
LRFD eq. 6.10.10.4.1-2.

𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = �𝑃𝑃𝑡𝑡2 + 𝐹𝐹𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟


2

where

𝑃𝑃𝑡𝑡 = 𝑃𝑃𝑝𝑝 + 𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛

𝑃𝑃𝑝𝑝 = min(0.85𝑓𝑓 ′ 𝑐𝑐 𝑏𝑏𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑡𝑡𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 ; 𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝐷𝐷𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 + 𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 + 𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 )

𝑃𝑃𝑛𝑛 = min(0.45𝑓𝑓 ′ 𝑐𝑐 𝑏𝑏𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑡𝑡𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 ; 𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝐷𝐷𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤 + 𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 + 𝑓𝑓𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 )
𝐿𝐿𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎ℎ
𝐹𝐹𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 = 𝑃𝑃𝑡𝑡 (AASHTO LRFD 6.10.10.4.2-1 to 9)
𝑅𝑅

Larch is calculated as 50% of girder span length and R is the radius of the
girder.

9 - 24 Strength Design Request


Chapter 9 - Design Steel I-Beam Bridge with Composite Slab

9.3.2 Shear
When processing the Design Request from the Design module, the program
assumes that there are no vertical stiffeners present and classifies all web
panels as unstiffened. If the shear capacity calculated based on this classifi-
cation is not sufficient to resist the demand specified in the Design Request,
the program recommends minimum stiffener spacing to achieve a Demand
over Capacity ratio equal to 1. The recommended stiffener spacing is report-
ed in the result table under the column heading d0req.

In the Optimization form (Design/Rating > Superstructure Design > Opti-


mize command), the user can specify stiffeners locations and the program
recalculates the shear resistance. In that case the program classifies the web
panels as interior or exterior and stiffened or unstiffened based on criteria
specified in AASHTO LRFD section 6.10.9.1e. It should be noted that stiff-
eners are not modeled in the Bridge Object and therefore adding/modifying
stiffeners does not affect the magnitude of the demands.

9.3.2.1 Nominal Resistance of Unstiffened Webs


The nominal shear resistance of unstiffened webs is taken as:

Vn = CVp (AASHTO LRFD 6.10.9.2-1)

in which

Vp = 0.58 Fyw Dt w (AASHTO LRFD 6.10.9.2-2)

C = the ratio of the shear-buckling resistance to the shear yield


strength that is determined as follows:

D Ek
If ≤ 1.12 , then C = 1.0.
tw Fyw

(AASHTO LRFD 6.10.9.3.2-4)

Ek D Ek 1.12 Ek
If 1.12 < ≤ 1.40 , then C = .
Fyw t w Fyw D Fyw
tw

Strength Design Request 9 - 25


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

(AASHTO LRFD 6.10.9.3.2-5)

D Ek 1.57  Ek 
If > 1.40 , then C = 2 F ,
tw Fyw D  yw 
t 
 w
(AASHTO LRFD 6.10.9.3.2-6)

5
in which k= 5 + 2
. (AASHTO LRFD 6.10.9.3.2-7)
 dc 
 
D

9.3.2.2 Nominal Resistance of Stiffened Interior Web Panels


The nominal shear resistance of an interior web panel and with the section
at the section cut proportioned such that:

2 Dt w
≤ 2.5 (AASHTO LRFD 6.10.9.3.2-1)
( b fc t fc + b ft t ft )
is taken as

 0.87 (1 − C ) 
=
Vn Vp C + (AASHTO LRFD 6.10.9.3.2-2)
2 
  do  
 1+   
 D 

in which Vp = 0.58 Fyw Dt w (AASHTO LRFD 6.10.9.3.2-3)

where

do = transverse stiffener spacing.


Otherwise, the nominal shear resistance is taken as follows:

 0.87 (1 − C ) 
=
Vn Vp C +  (AASHTO LRFD 6.10.9.3.2-8)
  2 
  do  do 
  1 +  D  + D 
  

9 - 26 Strength Design Request


Chapter 9 - Design Steel I-Beam Bridge with Composite Slab

9.3.2.3 Nominal Resistance of End Panels


The nominal shear resistance of a web end panel is taken as:

Vn = Vcr = CVp (AASHTO LRFD 6.10.9.3.3-1)

in which

Vp = 0.58Fyw Dt w . (AASHTO LRFD 6.10.9.3.3-2)

The demand over capacity ratio is evaluated as

Vu
DoverC = .
φvVn

9.4 Service Design Request


The Service Design Check calculates at every section cut stresses ff at the top
steel flange of the composite section and the bottom steel flange of the com-
posite section and compares them against limits specified in AASHTO LRFD
Section 6.10.4.2.2.

For the top steel flange of composite sections:

ff
DoverC = . (AASHTO LRFD 6.10.4.2.2-1)
0.95 Rh Fyf

For the bottom steel flange of composite sections:

fl
ff +
DoverC = 2 . (AASHTO LRFD 6.10.4.2.2-2)
0.95 Rh Fyf

For both steel flanges of noncomposite sections:

fl
ff +
DoverC = 2 . (AASHTO LRFD 6.10.4.2.2-3)
0.80 Rh Fyf

Service Design Request 9 - 27


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

The flange stresses are derived in the same way as fbu stress demands (see
Section 8.2.1 of this manual). The user has an option to specify if the con-
crete slab resists tension or not by setting the “Does concrete slab resist ten-
sion?” Design Request parameter. It is the responsibility of the user to verify
if the slab qualifies, in accordance with “Does concrete slab resist tension?”
Section 6.10.4.2.1, to resist tension.

For compact composite sections in positive flexure used in shored construc-


tion, the longitudinal compressive stress in the concrete deck, determined as
specified in AASHTO LRFD Article 6.10.1.1.1d, is checked against 0.6 f ′c .

DoverC = fdeck/0.6 f ′c

Except for composite sections in positive flexure in which the web satisfies
the requirement of AASHTO LRFD Article 6.10.2.1.1, all section cuts are
checked against the following requirement:

fc
DoverC = (AASHTO LRFD 6.10.2.2-4)
Fcrw

where:

fc = Compression-flange stress at the section under consideration due to


demand loads calculated without consideration of flange lateral bend-
ing.

Fcrw = Nominal bend-buckling resistance for webs without longitudinal stiff-


eners determined as specified in AASHTO LRFD Article 6.10.1.9

0.9 Ek
Fcrw = 2
(AASHTO LRFD 6.10.1.9.1-1)
D
t 
 w

but not to exceed the smaller of RhFyc and Fyw/0.7. In which

k = bend buckling coefficient

9
k= (AASHTO LRFD 6.10.1.9.1-2)
( Dc D)
2

9 - 28 Service Design Request


Chapter 9 - Design Steel I-Beam Bridge with Composite Slab

where

Dc = Depth of the web in compression in the elastic range determined as


specified in AASHTO LRFD Article D6.3.1.

When both edges of the web are in compression, k is taken as 7.2.

The highest Demand over Capacity ratio together with controlling equation
is reported for each section cut.

9.5 Fatigue Design Request


9.5.1 Web Fatigue
Web Fatigue Design Request is used to calculate the Demand over Capacity
ratio as defined in AASHTO LRFD Section 6.10.5.3 – Special Fatigue Re-
quirement for Webs. The requirement is applicable to interior panels of
webs with transverse stiffeners. When processing the Design Request from
the Design module, the program assumes that there are no vertical stiffeners
present and classifies all web panels as unstiffened. Therefore, when the De-
sign Request is completed from the Design module, the Design Result Status
table shows the message text “No stiffeners defined – use optimization form
to define stiffeners.”

In the Optimization form (Design/Rating > Superstructure Design > Opti-


mize command), the user can specify stiffener locations, and then the pro-
gram can recalculate the Web Fatigue Request. In that case the program
classifies the web panels as interior or exterior and stiffened or unstiffened
based on criteria specified in AASHTO LRFD Section 6.10.9.1. It should be
noted that stiffeners are not modeled in the Bridge Object and therefore
adding/modifying stiffeners does not affect the magnitude of the demands.

DoverC = Vu Vcr (AASHTO LRFD 6.10.5.3-1)

where

Vu = Shear in the web at the section under consideration due to demand


specified in the Design Request demand set combos. If the live load
distribution to girders method “Use Factor Specified by Design Code”

Fatigue Design Request 9 - 29


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

is selected in the Design Request, the program adjusts for the multiple
presence factor to account for the fact that fatigue load occupies only
one lane (AASHTO LRFD Section 3.6.1.4.3b) and multiple presence
factors shall not be applied when checking for the fatigue limit state
(AASHTO LRFD Section 3.6.1.1.2).

Vcr = Shear-buckling resistance determined from AASHTO LRFD eq.


6.10.9.3.3-1 (see Section 8.3.2.3 of this manual)

9.5.2 Flange Fatigue


For every demand set the top and bottom flange tensile stress range due to
vertical bending and bottom flange tensile stress range due to lateral bend-
ing are calculated at every section cut. The tensile stress ranges can be used
by the user to verify AASHTO LRFD load induced fatigue criteria specified
in article 6.6.1.2.2.

The flange stresses are derived in the same way as fbu stress demands (see
Section 8.2.1 of this manual). The tensile stress range for a particular de-
mand set is calculated as delta between maximum tensile stress and mini-
mum tensile stress. If the minimum stress is compressive and the maximum
stress is tensile the stress range is set equal to the maximum stress, if both
maximum and minimum stresses are compressive the stress range is set
equal to zero. If demand set does not contain an envelope of values the
stress range is also set to zero.

9.6 Constructability Design Request


9.6.1 Staged (Steel-I Comp Construct Stgd)
This request enables the user to verify the superstructure during construc-
tion using a Nonlinear Staged Construction load case. The use of nonlinear
staged analysis allows the user to define multiple snapshots of the structure
during construction where parts of the bridge deck may be at various com-
pletion stages. The user can control which stages the program will include
in the calculations of controlling demand over capacity ratios.

For each section cut specified in the Design Request, the constructability
design check loops through the Nonlinear Staged Construction load case

9 - 30 Constructability Design Request


Chapter 9 - Design Steel I-Beam Bridge with Composite Slab

output steps that correspond to Output Labels specified in the Demand Set.
At each step the program determines the status of the concrete slab at the
girder section cut. The slab status can be non present, present non-
composite, or composite.

The Staged Constructability Design Check accepts Area Object models. The
Staged Constructability Design Check cannot be run on Solid or Spine mod-
els.

9.6.2 Non-Staged (Steel-I Comp Construct NonStgd)


This request enables the user to verify Demand over Capacity ratios during
construction without the need to define and analyze a Nonlinear Staged
Construction load case. For each section cut specified in the Design Request
the Constructability Design Check loops through all combos specified in the
Demand Set list. At each combo the program assumes the status of the con-
crete slab as specified by the user in the Slab Status column. The slab status
can be non-composite or composite and applies to all the section cuts.

The Non-Staged Constructability Design Check accepts all Bridge Object


Structural Model Options available in the Update Bridge Structural Model
form (Bridge > Update > Structural Model Options option).

9.6.3 Slab Status vs. Unbraced Length


On the basis of the slab status, the program calculates corresponding posi-
tive flexural capacity, negative flexural capacity, and shear capacity. Next
the program compares the capacities against demands specified in the De-
mand Set by calculating the Demand over Capacity ratio. The controlling
Demand Set and Output Label on a girder basis are reported for every sec-
tion cut.

When the slab status is composite, the program assumes that the top flange
is continuously braced. When slab status in not present or non-composite,
the program treats both flanges as discretely braced. It should be noted that
the program does not verify the presence of diaphragms at a particular out-
put step. It assumes that anytime a steel beam is activated at a given section
cut that the unbraced length Lb for the bottom flange is equal to the dis-
tance between the nearest downstation and the upstation qualifying cross

Constructability Design Request 9 - 31


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

diaphragms or span ends as defined in the Bridge Object. The program as-
sumes the same Lb for the top flange. In other words the unbraced length Lb
is based on the cross diaphragms that qualify as providing restraint to the
bottom flange. Some of the diaphragm types available in CSiBridge may not
necessarily provide restraint to the top flange. It is the user’s responsibility
to provide top flange temporary bracing at the diaphragm locations before
slabs acting compositely.

9.6.4 Flexure
9.6.4.1 Positive Flexure Non Composite
The Demand over Capacity ratio is evaluated as:

 1 
D  fbucomp + fltop fbucomp + 3 fltop fbucomp fbutens + flbot 
= max  , , , 
C  φ f Rh Fyctop φ f Fnctop φ f Fcrwtop φ f Rh Fytbot
 

where Fnctop is the nominal flexural resistance of the discretely braced top
flange determined as specified in AASHTO LRFD Article 6.10.8.2 (also see
Section 8.3.1.3 of this manual) and Fcrwtop is the nominal bend–buckling re-
sistance for webs specified in AASHTO LRFD Article 6.10.1.9.1 for webs
without longitudinal stiffeners.

0.9 Ek
Fcrw = 2
(AASHTO LRFD 6.10.1.9.1-1)
D
t 
 w

but not to exceed the smaller of RhFyc and Fyw /0.7

where

9
k= 2
 Dc 
 
 D

When both edges of the web are in compression, k = 7.2.

9 - 32 Constructability Design Request


Chapter 9 - Design Steel I-Beam Bridge with Composite Slab

9.6.4.2 Positive Flexure Composite


The demand over capacity ratio is evaluated as:

 fbucomp fbucomp fbutens + flbot 


D C = max  , , 
 φ f Rh Fyctop φ f Fcrwtop φ f Rh Fytbot 

where Fcrwtop is nominal bend-buckling resistance for webs specified in


AASHTO LRFD Article 6.10.1.9.1 for webs without longitudinal stiffeners
(also see Section 8.6.4.1 of this manual).

9.6.4.3 Negative Flexure Non Composite


The Demand over Capacity ratio is evaluated as:

 1 
 fbucomp + flbot fbucomp + 3 flbot fbucomp fbutens + fltop 
D C = max  , , , 
 φ f Rh Fycbot φ f Fncbot φ f Fcrwbot φ f Rh Fyttop
 

where Fncbot is the nominal flexural resistance of the discretely braced bot-
tom flange determined as specified in AASHTO LRFD Article 6.10.8.2 (also
see Section 8.3.1.3 of this manual) and Fcrwbot is nominal bend-buckling re-
sistance for webs specified in AASHTO LRFD Article 6.10.1.9.1 for webs
without longitudinal stiffeners (also see Section 8.6.4.1 of this manual).

9.6.4.4 Negative Flexure Composite


The demand over capacity ratio is evaluated as:

 1 
 fbucomp + flbot fbucomp + 3 flbot fbucomp f f 
D C = max  , , , butens , deck 
 φ f Rh Fycbot φ f Fncbot φ f Fcrwbot φ f Rh Fyttop φt fr
 

where Fncbot is the nominal flexural resistance of the discretely braced bot-
tom flange determined as specified in AASHTO LRFD Article 6.10.8.2 (also
see Section 8.3.1.3 of this manual), Fcrwbot is the nominal bend–buckling re-
sistance for webs specified in AASHTO LRFD Article 6.10.1.9.1 for webs
without longitudinal stiffeners (also see Section 8.6.4.1 of this manual), and
fdeck is the demand tensile stress in the deck and fr is the modulus of rupture
of concrete as determined in AASHTO LRFD Article 5.4.2.6.

Constructability Design Request 9 - 33


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

9.6.5 Shear
When processing the Design Request from the Design module, the program
assumes that there are no vertical stiffeners present and classifies all web
panels as unstiffened. If the shear capacity calculated based on this classifi-
cation is not sufficient to resist the demand specified in the Design Request
and the controlling D over C ratio is occurring at a step when the slab status
is composite, the program recommends minimum stiffener spacing to
achieve a Demand over Capacity ratio equal to 1. The recommended stiffen-
er spacing is reported in the result table under the column heading d0req.

In the Optimization form (Design/Rating > Superstructure Design > Opti-


mize command), the user can specify stiffener locations and then the pro-
gram can recalculate the shear resistance. In that case the program classifies
the web panels as interior or exterior and stiffened or unstiffened based on
criteria specified in Section 6.10.9.1 of the code. It should be noted that
stiffeners are not modeled in the Bridge Object and therefore add-
ing/modifying stiffeners does not affect the magnitude of the demands.
Adding stiffeners also does not increase capacity of sections cuts where the
concrete slab status is other than composite.

9.6.5.1 Non Composite Sections


The nominal shear resistance of a web end panel is taken as:

V=
n V=
cr CVP (AASHTO LRFD 6.10.9.3.3-1)

in which

Vp = 0.58Fyw Dt w . (AASHTO LRFD 6.10.9.3.3-2)

The Demand over Capacity ratio is evaluated as

Vu
DoverC =
φvVn

9 - 34 Constructability Design Request


Chapter 9 - Design Steel I-Beam Bridge with Composite Slab

9.6.5.2 Composite Section

9.6.5.2.1 Nominal Resistance of Unstiffened Webs


The nominal shear resistance of unstiffened webs is taken as:

Vn = CVp (AASHTO LRFD 6.10.9.2-1)

in which

Vp = 0.58 Fyw Dt w (AASHTO LRFD 6.10.9.2-2)

C = the ratio of the shear-buckling resistance to the shear yield


strength that is determined as follows:

D Ek
If ≤ 1.12 , then C = 1.0. (AASHTO LRFD 6.10.9.3.2-4)
tw Fyw

Ek D Ek 1.12 Ek
If 1.12 < ≤ 1.40 , then C = .
Fyw t w Fyw D Fyw
tw
AASHTO LRFD (6.10.9.3.2-5)

D Ek 1.57  Ek 
If > 1.40 , then C = 2 F ,
tw Fyw D  yw 
t 
 w
AASHTO LRFD (6.10.9.3.2-6)

5
in which k= 5 + 2
. (AASHTO LRFD 6.10.9.3.2-7)
 dc 
 
D

9.6.5.2.2 Nominal Resistance of Stiffened Interior Web Panels


The nominal shear resistance of an interior web panel, with the section at
the section cut proportioned such that

2 Dt w
≤ 2.5, (AASHTO LRFD 6.10.9.3.2-1)
( fc fc + b ft t ft )
b t

Constructability Design Request 9 - 35


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

is taken as

 0.87 (1 − C ) 
=
Vn Vp C + (AASHTO LRFD 6.10.9.3.2-2)
2 
  do  
 1+   
 D 

in which Vp = 0.58 Fyw Dt w (AASHTO LRFD 6.10.9.3.2-3)

where

do = transverse stiffener spacing.


Otherwise, the nominal shear resistance is taken as follows:

 0.87 (1 − C ) 
=
Vn Vp C +  (AASHTO LRFD 6.10.9.3.2-8)
  2 
  do  do 
  1 +   + 
   D  D 

9.6.5.2.3 Nominal Resistance of End Panels


The nominal shear resistance of a web end panel is taken as:

V=
n V=
cr CVP (AASHTO LRFD 6.10.9.3.3-1)

in which

Vp = 0.58Fyw Dt w . (AASHTO LRFD 6.10.9.3.3-2)

The demand over capacity ratio is evaluated as

Vu
DoverC =
φvVn

9.7 Section Optimization


After at least one Steel Design Request has been successfully processed,
CSiBridge enables the user to open a Steel Section Optimization module.
The Optimization module allows interactive modification of steel plate sizes
and definition of vertical stiffeners along each girder and span. It recalcu-

9 - 36 Section Optimization
Chapter 9 - Design Steel I-Beam Bridge with Composite Slab

lates resistance “on the fly” based on the modified section without the need
to unlock the model and rerun the analysis. It should be noted that in the
optimization process the demands are not recalculated and are based on the
current CSiBridge analysis results.

The Optimization form allows simultaneous display of three versions of sec-


tion sizes and associated resistance results. The section plate size versions
are “As Analyzed,” “As Designed,” and “Current.” The section plots use dis-
tinct colors for each version – black for As Analyzed, blue for As Designed,
and red for Current. When the Optimization form is initially opened, all
three versions are identical and equal to “As Analyzed.”

Two graphs are available to display various forces, moments, stresses, and
ratios for the As Analyzed or As Designed versions. The values plotted can
be controlled by clicking the “Select Series to Plot” button. The As Ana-
lyzed series are plotted as solid lines and the As Designed series as dashed
lines.

To modify steel plate sizes or vertical stiffeners, a new form can be dis-
played by clicking on the Modify Section button. After the section modifica-
tion is completed, the Current version is shown in red in the elevation and
cross section views. After the resistance has been recalculated successfully
by clicking the Recalculate Resistance button, the Current version is desig-
nated to As Designed and displayed in blue.

After the section optimization has been completed, the As Designed plate
sizes and materials can be applied to the analysis bridge object by clicking
the OK button. The button opens a new form that can be used to Unlock
the existing model (in that case all analysis results will be deleted) or save
the file under a new name (New File button). Clicking the Exit button does
not apply the new plate sizes to the bridge object and keeps the model
locked. The As Designed version of the plate sizes will be available the next
time the form is opened, and the Current version is discarded.

9.8 PennDOT Amendments for DM-4


When setting the bridge superstructure design code preferences for the
AASHTO LFRD 2014 code (all interims), an option called “Design Amend-

PennDOT Amendments for DM-4 9 - 37


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

ments” is available which can be set to “None” or “PennDOT”. This is done


using command Design/Rating > Superstructure Design > Code Preferences.

With this option is set to “PennDOT”, several changes are made to the de-
sign procedure to account for the following requirements of the Pennsylva-
nia Department of Transportation (PennDOT) Design Manual, Part 4, April
2015 Edition (DM-4):

1. When live-load distribution factors (LLDF) are used, these are cal-
culated taking into account the provisions of DM-4 Section 4.6.2.2.

2. The provisions of DM-4 Section 6.10.1.9.3P regarding web bend-


buckling nominal flexural resistance are incorporated. The depth of
web in compression is calculated assuming that no longitudinal
stiffeners are present. The stresses from dead and construction loads
are derived from demands Mdnc and Mdc specified in the design
request.

3. The provisions of DM-4 Section 6.10.9.3.3 regarding end panels are


incorporated. The effect of longitudinal stiffeners is not considered.

It should be noted that the design procedure does not check for the pres-
ence of splices in panels when verifying if a section can be classified as
compact. You should not use the design results for any panels containing
splices that have been classified as compact.

The DM-4 Section 6.10.1.5 requirement to ignore haunches when compu-


ting flexural stiffness and resistance of beams while taking into account the
haunch dead weight can be approximately satisfied by specifying haunch
thickness in the bridge-section definition equal to the maximum flange
thickness. The weight of the remaining haunch can be applied as a superim-
posed line load on top the girders. If you choose instead to include the full
haunch thickness in the model, the difference in results tends to be small
unless the haunch is deep.

Prior to running the superstructure design, the analysis should be include


the appropriate PennDOT vehicles as needed for live load. A PennDOT ve-
hicle library is provided in addition to the regular AASHTO vehicles. Use
the command Loads > Vehicles, and click the lower right arrow icon to

9 - 38 PennDOT Amendments for DM-4


Chapter 9 - Design Steel I-Beam Bridge with Composite Slab

show the Define Vehicles form. Then use the Import button to locate the
vehicles under Unites States > PennDOT. Once imported, these vehicles can
be modified, if necessary.

Appropriate load combinations should be created prior to running the su-


perstructure design. Use the command Design/Rating > Load Combinations
> Add Defaults. Select “Bridge Design”, and set “Amendment” to “Penn-
DOT–Steel Girder”. See section 2.2.3 “AASHTO LRFD Code with PennDOT
Amendments” in this manual for more information.

PennDOT Amendments for DM-4 9 - 39


Chapter 10
Design Steel U-Tub Bridge with Composite Slab

This chapter describes the algorithms CSiBridge applies when designing steel
U-tub with composite slab superstructures in accordance with the AASHTO
LRFD 2014 (AASHTO LRFD).

10.1 Section Properties


10.1.1 Yield Moments
10.1.1.1 Composite Section in Positive Flexure
The positive yield moment, My, is determined by the program in accordance
with section D6.2.2 of the code using the following user-defined input, which
is part of the Design Request (see Chapter 4 for more information about Design
Request).

Mdnc = The user specifies in the Design Request the name of the combo that
represents the moment caused by the factored permanent load applied
before the concrete deck has hardened or is made composite.

Mdc = The user specifies in the Design Request the name of the combo that
represents the moment caused by the remainder of the factored perma-
nent load (applied to the composite section).

The program solves for MAD from the following equation,

10 - 1
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

M dnc M dc M AD
Fyt = + + (D6.2.2-1)
S NC SLT SST

and then calculates yield moment based on the following equation


M y = M dnc + M dc + M AD (D6.2.2-2)

where

SNC = Noncomposite section modulus (in.3)

SLT = Long-term composite section modulus (in.3)

SST = Short-term composite section modulus (in.3)

My is taken as the lesser value calculated for the compression flange, Myc, or the
tension flange, Myt. The positive My is calculated only once based on Mdnc and
Mdc demands specified by the user in the Design Request. It should be noted
that the My calculated in the procedure described here is used by the program
only to determine Mnpos for compact sections in positive bending in a continu-
ous span, where the nominal flexural resistance may be controlled by My in ac-
cordance with (eq. 6.10.7.1.2-3).

M n ≤ 1.3 Rh M y

10.1.1.2 Composite Section in Negative Flexure


For composite sections in negative flexure, the procedure described for positive
yield moment is followed, except that the composite section for both short-term
and long-term moments consists of the steel section and the longitudinal rein-
forcement within the tributary width of the concrete deck. Thus, SST and SLT are
the same value. Also, Myt is taken with respect to either the tension flange or
the longitudinal reinforcement, whichever yields first. The negative My is cal-
culated only once based on the Mdnc and Mdc demands specified by the user in
the Design Request.

10.1.2 Plastic Moments


10.1.2.1 Composite Section in Positive Flexure
The positive plastic moment, Mp, is calculated as the moment of the plastic
forces about the plastic neutral axis. Plastic forces in the steel portions of a

10 - 2 Section Properties
Chapter 10 - Design Steel U-Tub Bridge with Composite Slab

cross-section are calculated using the yield strengths of the flanges, the web,
and reinforcing steel, as appropriate. Plastic forces in the concrete portions of
the cross-section that are in compression are based on a rectangular stress block
with the magnitude of the compressive stress equal to 0.85 fc′. Concrete in ten-
sion is neglected. The position of the plastic neutral axis is determined by the
equilibrium condition, where there is no net axial force. In calculating Mp for
positive moment, the contribution of the rebar in the deck is ignored.

The plastic moment of a composite section in positive flexure is determined by:

• Calculating the effective width of bottom flange per 6.11.1.1

• Calculating the element forces and using them to determine if the plastic neu-
tral axis is in the web, top flange, or concrete deck;

• Calculating the location of the plastic neutral axis within the element deter-
mined in the first step;

and

• Calculating Mp.

Equations for the various potential locations of the plastic neutral axis (PNA)
are given in Table 10-1.

Table 10-1 Calculation of PNA and M p for Sections in Positive Flexure

Case PNA Condition Y and M p


 D   P − Pc − Ps − Prt − Prb 
= Y   t + 1
 2  Pw 
P t + P w ≥ P c + P s + P rb +
I In Web
w  2 
Y + ( D − Y )  + [ Ps ds + Prt drt + Prb d rb + Pc dc + Pt dt ]
Pn P 2
=
M p
2D

 t   P + Pt − Ps − Prt − Prb 
= Y  c  w + 1
In Top P t + P w + P c ≥ Ps + Prb +  2  Pc 
II
Flanges Pn
Y + ( tc − Y )  + [ Ps ds + Pn dn + Prb d rb + Pw dw + Pt dt ]
Pc  2 2
=
M
2t c 
p

Section Properties 10 - 3
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Table 10-1 Calculation of PNA and M p for Sections in Positive Flexure

Case PNA Condition Y and M p


 P + Pw + Pt − Prt − Prb 
Concrete Y = ( ts )  c 
Deck c   Ps 
III Pt + Pw + Pc ≥  rb  Ps + Prb + Pn
Below  t2   Y 2 Ps 
Prb M=p   + [ Prt drt + Prb d rb + Pc dc + Pw dw + Pt dt ]
 2t s 

Concrete Y = crb
c 
IV Deck at Pt + Pw + Pc + Prb ≥  rb  Ps + Pn  Y 2 Ps 
Prb  ts  M=
p   + [ Prt drt + Pc dc + Pw dw + Pt dt ]
 2t s 

Concrete  P + Pc + Pw + Pt − Prt 
Deck Y = ( t s )  rb 
Above c   Ps 
V Pt + Pw + Pc + Prb ≥  rt  Ps + Pn
Prb and  ts   Y Ps 
2

Below M=p   + [ Prt drt + Prb drb + Pc dc + Pw dw + Pt dt ]


Prt  2t s 

Concrete Y = crt
c 
VI Deck at Pt + Pw + Pc + Prb + Pn ≥  rt  Ps  Y 2 Ps 
Prt  ts  M=
p   + [ Prb drb + Pc dc + Pw dw + Pt dt ]
 2t s 

 P + Pc + Pw + Pt + Prt 
Concrete Y = ( t s )  rb 
Deck c   Ps 
VII Pt + Pw + Pc + Prb + Prt <  rt  Ps
Above  ts   Y 2 Ps 
Prt M=p   + [ Prt drt + Prb drb + Pc dc + Pw dw + Pt dt ]
 2t s 

10 - 4 Section Properties
Chapter 10 - Design Steel U-Tub Bridge with Composite Slab

Arb Crt
Art
Prt
Ps Crb Y
Prb PNA PNA
Pc Y
Y
Pw PNA

Pt
CASE I CASE II CASES III -VII

Figure 10-1 Plastic Neutral Axis Cases – Positive Flexure

Prt = Fyrt Art


Ps = 0.85 fc′ bsts
Prb = Fyrb Arb
Pc = 2 Fycbctc
Pw = (2 Fyw Dtw)/cos αweb
Pt = Fyt bttt where bt is effective width of bottom flange per 6.11.1.1

Next the section is checked for ductility requirement in accordance with equa-
tion 6.10.7.3. In checking the ductility per 6.10.7.3, the depth of the haunch is
neglected.

Dp ≤ 0.42Dt

where,

Dp is the distance from the top of the concrete deck to the neutral axis of the
composite section at the plastic moment.

Dt is the total depth of the composite section.

At the section where the ductility requirement is not satisfied, the plastic mo-
ment of a composite section in positive flexure is set to zero.

10.1.2.2 Composite Section in Negative Flexure


The plastic moment of a composite section in negative flexure is calculated by
an analogous procedure. Equations for the two cases most likely to occur in

Section Properties 10 - 5
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

practice are given in Table 10-2. The plastic moment of a noncomposite section
is calculated by eliminating the terms pertaining to the concrete deck and longi-
tudinal reinforcement from the equations for composite sections.

Table 10-2 Calculation of PNA and Mp for Sections in Negative Flexure

Case PNA Condition Y and Mp

 D   P − Pt − Prt − Prb 
= Y   c + 1
 2  Pw 
I In Web Pc + Pw ≥ Pt + Prb + Pn
Pw  2 ( 
Y + D − Y )  + [ Pn dn + Prb drb + Pt dt + Pd
l l]
2
=
M p
2D

 t   P − Pc − Prt − Prb 
= Y  l  w + 1
In Top  
2 P 
Pc + Pw + Pt ≥ Prb + Pn
t
II
Flange
Y + ( tl − Y )  + [ Pn dn + Prb drb + Pw dw + Pc dc ]
Pt  2 2
=
M
2tl 
p

Art Arb
Prt
Prb
Pt PNA
Y Y
Pw PNA

Pc
CASE I CASE II

Figure 10-2 Plastic Neutral Axis Cases – Negative Flexure

Prt = Fyrt Art


Ps = 0
Prb = Fyrb Arb
Pc = Fycbctc where bc is effective width of bottom flange per 6.11.1.1

10 - 6 Section Properties
Chapter 10 - Design Steel U-Tub Bridge with Composite Slab

Pw = (2Fyw Dtw)/cos αweb


Pt = 2Fyt bttt

In the equations for Mp, d is the distance from an element force to the plastic
neutral axis. Element forces act at (a) mid-thickness for the flanges and the
concrete deck, (b) mid-depth of the web, and (c) center of reinforcement. All
element forces, dimensions, and distances are taken as positive. The conditions
are checked in the order listed.

10.1.3 Section Classification and Factors


10.1.3.1 Compact or Non-Compact - Positive Flexure
The program determines if the section can be qualified as compact based on the
following criteria:

• the bridge is not horizontally curved

• the specified minimum yield strengths of the flanges do not exceed 70.0 ksi,

• the web satisfies the requirement of Article (6.11.2.1.2),

D
≤ 150
tw

• the section satisfies requirements of 6.11.2.3

• the box flange is fully effective as specified in 6.11.1.1

• the section satisfies web slenderness limit

2 Dcp E
≤ 3.76 . (6.11.6.2.2-1)
tw Fyc

The user can control in the design request parameters how the program shall
determine if the bridge is straight or horizontally. If the “Determined by pro-
gram” option is selected the algorithm checks for radius of the layout line at
every valid section cut. If the radius is a definite number the bridge is classified
as horizontally curved.

Section Properties 10 - 7
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

10.1.3.2 Hybrid Factor Rh – Positive Flexure


For homogenous built-up sections, and built-up sections with a higher-strength
steel in the web than in both flanges, Rh is taken as 1.0. Otherwise the hybrid
factor is taken as:

12 + β ( 3 ρ − ρ 3 )
Rh = (6.10.1.10.1-1)
12 + 2 β

where

2 Dn t w
β= (6.10.1.10.1-2)
A fn

ρ = the smaller of Fyw fn and 1.0

Afn = bottom flange area.

Dn = the larger of the distances from the elastic neutral axis of the cross-
section to the inside face of either flange. For sections where the neu-
tral axis is at the mid-depth of the web, Dn is the distance from the
neutral axis to the inside face of the flange on the side of the neutral
axis where yielding occurs first.

Fn = fy of the bottom flange.

10.1.3.3 Web Load-Shedding Factor Rb – Positive Flexure


For composite sections in positive flexure, the Rb factor is taken as equal to 1.0.

10.1.3.4 Web Load-Shedding Factor Rb – Negative Flexure


For composite sections in negative flexure, the Rb factor is taken as:

 awc  2 Dc 
Rb =
1− 
+  t − λrw  ≤ 1.0 (6.10.1.10.2)
 1200 300 awc   w 

where

E
λrw = 5.7 (6.10.1.10.2-4)
Fyc

10 - 8 Section Properties
Chapter 10 - Design Steel U-Tub Bridge with Composite Slab

2 Dc t w
awc = (6.10.1.10.2-5)
b fc t fc

When the user specifies the design request parameter “Do webs have longitu-
dinal stiffeners?” as yes, the Rb factor is set to 1.0 (see Chapter 4 for more in-
formation about specifying Design Request parameters).

10.2 Demand Sets


Demand Set combos (at least one required) are user-defined combination based
on LRFD combinations (see Chapter 4 for more information about specifying
Demand Sets). The demands from all specified demand combos are enveloped
and used to calculate D/C ratios. The way the demands are used depends on if
the parameter "Use Stage Analysis?” is set to Yes or No.

If “Yes,” the program reads the stresses on beams and slabs directly from the
section cut results. The program assumes that the effects of the staging of loads
applied to non-composite versus composite section and the concrete slab mate-
rial time dependent properties were captured by using the nonlinear stage anal-
ysis load case available in CSiBridge.

If “Use Stage Analysis? = No,” the program decomposes load cases present in
every demand set combo to three Bridge Design Action categories: non-
composite, composite long term, and composite short term. The program uses
the load case Bridge Design Action parameter to assign the load cases to the
appropriate categories. A default Bridge Design Action parameter is assigned
to a load case based on its Design Type. However, the parameter can be
overwritten: click the Analysis > Load Cases > {Type} > New command to
display the Load Case Data – {Type} form; click the Design button next to the
Load case type drop down list, under the heading Bridge Design Action select
the User Defined option and select a value from the list. The assigned Bridge
Designed Action values are handled by the program in the following manner:

Table 10-3 Bridge Design Action

Bridge Design Action Value Bridge Design Action Category


specified by the user used in the design algorithm
Non-Composite Non-Composite

Demand Sets 10 - 9
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Table 10-3 Bridge Design Action

Bridge Design Action Value Bridge Design Action Category


specified by the user used in the design algorithm
Long-Term Composite Long-Term Composite
Short-Term Composite Short-Term Composite
Staged Non-Composite
Other Non-Composite

10.2.1 Demand Flange Stresses fbu and ff


Evaluation of the flange stress, fbu, calculated without consideration of flange
lateral bending is dependent on setting the “Use Stage Analysis?” design re-
quest parameter.

If the “Use Stage Analysis? = No,” then

P M NC M LTC M STC
fbu = + + +
Acomp Ssteel SLTC SSTC

where,

MNC is the demand moment on the noncomposite section.

MLTC is the demand moment on the long-term composite section.

MSTC is the demand moment on the short-term composite section.

The short term section modulus for positive moment is calculated by trans-
forming the concrete deck using steel to concrete modular ratio. The modular
ratio (n) is calculated as a decimal number expressed as n=Es/Ec and used
without rounding. The long term section modulus for positive moment is using
a modular ratio factored by n, where n is specified in the “Modular ratio long
term multiplier” Design Parameter. The effect of compression reinforcement is
ignored. For negative moment, the concrete deck is assumed cracked and is not
included in the section modulus calculations, whereas tension reinforcement is
taken into account.

10 - 10 Demand Sets
Chapter 10 - Design Steel U-Tub Bridge with Composite Slab

The effective width of bottom flange per 6.11.1.1. is used to calculate the
stresses. However, when design request parameter “Use Stage Analysis? =
Yes,” then the fbu stresses on both top and bottom flanges are read directly from
the section cut results. In that case the stresses are calculated based on gross
section; the use of effective section properties cannot be accommodated with
this option. Therefore, if the section bottom flange does not satisfy criteria of
6.11.1.1 as being fully effective, the design parameter "Use Stage Analysis?”
should be set to No.

When “Use Stage Analysis? = Yes,” the program assumes that the effects of
the staging of loads applied to non-composite versus composite sections and
the concrete slab material time dependent properties were captured by using the
Nonlinear Staged Construction load case available in CSiBridge. The “Modular
ratio long-term multiplier.” is not used in this case.

The program verifies the sign of the stress in the composite slab, and if stress is
positive (tension), the program assumes that the entire section cut demand
moment is carried by the steel section only. This is to reflect the fact that the
concrete in the composite slab is cracked and does not contribute to the re-
sistance of the section.

Flange stress ff used in the Service design check is evaluated in the same man-
ner as the stress fbu, with one exception. When the Design Parameter “Does
concrete slab resist tension?” in the Steel Service Design request is set to
“Yes,” the program uses section properties based on a transformed section as-
suming the concrete slab to be fully effective in both tension and compression.

10.2.2 Demand Flange Lateral Bending Stress fl


The top flange lateral bending stress fl is evaluated only for constructability de-
sign check when slab status is ‘non-composite” and when all of the following
conditions are met:

 “Steel Girders” has been selected for the deck section type (Components >
Superstructure Item > Deck Sections command) and the Girder Modeling
In Area Object Models – Model Girders Using Area Objects option is set to
“Yes” on the Define Bridge Section Data – Steel Girder form.

Demand Sets 10 - 11
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

 The bridge object is modeled using Area Objects. This option can be set us-
ing the Bridge > Update command to display the “Update Bridge Structural
Model“ form; then select the Update as Area Object Model option.

In all other cases, the top flange lateral bending stress is set to zero. The fl
stresses on each top flange are read directly from the section cut results and the
maximum absolute value stress from the two top flanges is reported.

10.2.3 Depth of the Web in Compression


For composite sections in positive flexure, the depth of web in compression is
computed using the following equation:

 − fc 
=Dc   d − t fc ≥ 0 (D6.3.1-1)
 fc + ft 

Figure 10-3 Web in Compression – Positive Flexure

where,

fc = sum of the compression-flange stresses caused by the different loads, i.e.,


DC1, the permanent load acting on the noncomposite section; DC2, the
permanent load acting on the long-term composite section; DW, the wear-
ing surface load; and LL+IM acting on their respective sections. fc is tak-
en as negative when the stress is in compression. Flange lateral bending
is disregarded in this calculation.

10 - 12 Demand Sets
Chapter 10 - Design Steel U-Tub Bridge with Composite Slab

ft = the sum of the tension-flange stresses caused by the different loads.


Flange lateral bending is disregarded in this calculation.

For composite sections in negative flexure, DC is computed for the section con-
sisting of the steel U-tub plus the longitudinal reinforcement, with the excep-
tion of the following. For composite sections in negative flexure at the Service
Design Check Request where the concrete deck is considered effective in ten-
sion for computing flexural stresses on the composite section (Design Parame-
ter “Does concrete slab resist tension?” = Yes), DC is computed from (eq. D
6.3.1-1). For this case, the stresses fc and ft are switched, the signs shown in the
stress diagram are reversed, tfc is the thickness of the bottom flange, and DC in-
stead extends from the neutral axis down to the top of the bottom flange.

10.3 Strength Design Request


The strength design check calculates at every section cut positive flexural ca-
pacity, negative flexural capacity, and shear capacity. It then compares the ca-
pacities against the envelope of demands specified in the design request.

10.3.1 Flexure
10.3.1.1 Positive Flexure – Compact
The nominal flexural resistance of the section is evaluated as follows:

If Dp ≤ 0.1 Dt, then Mn = Mp, otherwise

 Dp 
=M n M p  1.07 − 0.7  (6.10.7.1.2-2)
 Dt 

In a continuous span the nominal flexural resistance of the section is deter-


mined as

Mn ≤ 1.3RhMy

where Rh is a hybrid factor for the section in positive flexure.

The demand over capacity ratio is evaluated as


𝑀𝑀𝑢𝑢
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 =
∅𝑓𝑓 𝑀𝑀𝑛𝑛

Strength Design Request 10 - 13


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

10.3.1.2 Positive Flexure – Non-Compact


Nominal flexural resistance of the top compression flanges is taken as:

Fnc = RbRhFyc (6.11.7.2.1-1)

Nominal flexural resistance of the bottom tension flange is taken as:

Fnt = RhFytΔ (6.10.7.2.1-2)

Where

2
𝑓𝑓𝑣𝑣
∆= �1 − 3 � �
𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦

𝑇𝑇
Where 𝑓𝑓𝑣𝑣 = is St. Venant torsional shear stress in the flange due to the
2𝐴𝐴0 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
factored loads and A0 is enclosed area within the box section

The demand over capacity ratio is evaluated as

𝑓𝑓𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑓𝑓𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 = 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 � , �
∅𝑓𝑓 𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 ∅𝑓𝑓 𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛

10.3.1.3 Negative Flexure


Nominal flexural resistance of continuously braced top flange in tension is tak-
en as:

Fnt = RhFyt (6.11.8.3)

Nominal flexural resistance of the bottom unstiffened compression flange is


taken as:

𝑓𝑓𝑣𝑣 2
𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 = 𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 �1 − � � (6.11.8.2.2-1)
𝜙𝜙𝑣𝑣 𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐

In which:

𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = nominal axial compression buckling resistance of the flange un-


der compression alone calculated as follows:

10 - 14 Strength Design Request


Chapter 10 - Design Steel U-Tub Bridge with Composite Slab

• If 𝜆𝜆𝑓𝑓 ≤ 𝜆𝜆𝑝𝑝 , then:

𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = 𝑅𝑅𝑏𝑏 𝑅𝑅ℎ 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 Δ (6.11.8.2.2-2)

• If 𝜆𝜆𝑝𝑝 ≤ 𝜆𝜆𝑓𝑓 ≤ 𝜆𝜆𝑟𝑟 , then:

Δ−0.3 λf −λp
𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = 𝑅𝑅𝑏𝑏 𝑅𝑅ℎ 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 �Δ − �Δ − �� �� (6.11.8.2.2-3)
Rh λr −λp

• If 𝜆𝜆𝑓𝑓 ≤ 𝜆𝜆𝑟𝑟 , then:

0.9𝐸𝐸𝑅𝑅𝑏𝑏 𝑘𝑘
𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = (6.11.8.2.2-4)
𝜆𝜆2𝑓𝑓

𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = nominal shear buckling resistance of the flange under shear alone
calculated as follows:

𝐸𝐸𝑘𝑘𝑠𝑠
• If 𝜆𝜆𝑓𝑓 ≤ 1.12� , then:
𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦

𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = 0.58𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 (6.11.8.2.2-5)

𝐸𝐸𝑘𝑘𝑠𝑠 𝐸𝐸𝑘𝑘𝑠𝑠
• If 1.12� < 𝜆𝜆𝑓𝑓 ≤ 1.40� , then:
𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦

0.65�𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝐸𝐸𝑘𝑘𝑠𝑠
𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = (6.11.8.2.2-6)
𝜆𝜆𝑓𝑓

𝐸𝐸𝑘𝑘𝑠𝑠
• If 𝜆𝜆𝑓𝑓 > 1.40� , then:
𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦

0.9𝐸𝐸𝑘𝑘𝑠𝑠
𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = (6.11.8.2.2-7)
𝜆𝜆2𝑓𝑓

𝜆𝜆𝑓𝑓 = slenderness ratio for the compression flange

𝑏𝑏𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
= (6.11.8.2.2-8)
𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓

𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸
𝜆𝜆𝑝𝑝 = 0.57� (6.11.8.2.2-9)
𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 Δ

Strength Design Request 10 - 15


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸
𝜆𝜆𝑟𝑟 = 0.95� (6.11.8.2.2-10)
𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦

2
𝑓𝑓
Δ = �1 − 3 � 𝑣𝑣 � (6.11.8.2.2-11)
𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦

𝑓𝑓𝑣𝑣 = St. Venant torsional shear stress in the flange due to the factored
loads at the section under consideration (ksi)
𝑇𝑇
= (6.11.8.2.2-12)
2𝐴𝐴0 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓

𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 = smaller of the compression-flange stress at the onset of nominal


yielding, with consideration of residual stress effects, or the
specified minimum yield strength of the web (ksi)

= (Δ − 0.3)𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 (6.11.8.2.2-13)

k = plate-buckling coefficient for uniform normal stress

= 4.0

ks = plate-buckling coefficient for shear stress

= 5.34

The demand over capacity ratio is evaluated as

𝑓𝑓𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑓𝑓𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 = 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 � , �
∅𝑓𝑓 𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 ∅𝑓𝑓 𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛

10.3.2 Shear
When processing the design request from the Design module, the program as-
sumes that no vertical stiffeners are present and classifies all web panels as un-
stiffened. If the shear capacity calculated based on this classification is not suf-
ficient to resist the demand specified in the design request, the program rec-
ommends minimum stiffener spacing to achieve a demand over capacity ratio
equal to 1. The recommended stiffener spacing is reported in the result table
under the column heading d0req.

10 - 16 Strength Design Request


Chapter 10 - Design Steel U-Tub Bridge with Composite Slab

In the Optimization form (Design/Rating > Superstructure Design > Opti-


mize command), the user can specify stiffener locations and the program recal-
culates the shear resistance. In that case the program classifies the web panels
as interior or exterior and stiffened or unstiffened based on criteria specified in
Section 6.10.9.1 of the code. It should be noted that stiffeners are not modeled
in the Bridge Object and therefore adding/modifying stiffeners does not affect
the magnitude of the demands.

10.3.2.1 Nominal Resistance of Unstiffened Webs


In the following equations D is taken as depth of the web plate measured along
the slope and each web demand over capacity ratio is calculated based on shear
due to factored loads taken as
𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢
𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 =
cos 𝛼𝛼𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤

Where Vu is vertical shear due to the factored loads on one inclined web and
αweb is the angle of inclination of the web plate to the vertical. The Vui value is
reported in the result tables.

The nominal shear resistance of unstiffened webs is taken as:

Vn = CVp (6.10.9.2-1)

in which

Vp = 0.58 Fyw Dt w (6.10.9.2-2)

C = the ratio of the shear-buckling resistance to the shear yield strength


that is determined as follows:

D Ek
If ≤ 1.12 , then C = 1.0. (6.10.9.3.2-4)
tw Fyw

Ek D Ek 1.12 Ek
If 1.12 < ≤ 1.40 , then C = . (6.10.9.3.2-5)
Fyw t w Fyw D Fyw
tw

Strength Design Request 10 - 17


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

D Ek 1.57  Ek 
If > 1.40 , then C = 2  , (6.10.9.3.2-6)
tw Fyw  D   Fyw 
t 
 w

5
in which k= 5 + 2
. (6.10.9.3.2-7)
 dc 
 
D

10.3.2.2 Nominal Resistance of Stiffened Interior Web Panels


The nominal shear resistance of an interior web panel and with the section at
the section cut proportioned such that
2 Dt w
≤ 2.5 (6.10.9.3.2-1)
( b fc t fc + b ft t ft )
is taken as

 0.87 (1 − C ) 
=
Vn Vp C +
2 
(6.10.9.3.2-2)
  do  
 1+   
 D 

in which Vp = 0.58 Fyw Dt w (6.10.9.3.2-3)

where

do = transverse stiffener spacing.

Otherwise, the nominal shear resistance is taken as follows:

 0.87 (1 − C ) 
=
Vn Vp C +  (6.10.9.3.2-8)
  2 
  do  do 
  1 +  D  + D 
  

10.3.2.3 Nominal Resistance of End Panels


The nominal shear resistance of a web end panel is taken as:

V=
n V=
cr CVp (6.10.9.3.3-1)

10 - 18 Strength Design Request


Chapter 10 - Design Steel U-Tub Bridge with Composite Slab

in which

Vp = 0.58 Fyw Dt w . (6.10.9.3.3-2)

10.3.2.4 Torsion Effects


For all single box sections, horizontally curved section, and multiple box sec-
tions in bridges not satisfying the requirements of Article 6.11.2.3, or with bot-
tom flange that is not fully effective according to the provisions of Article
6.11.1.1 Vui is taken as the sum of the flexural and St. Venant torsional shears.
The St. Venant torsional shear is calculated as:

𝑉𝑉𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 = 𝑓𝑓𝑣𝑣 𝐴𝐴𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤


𝑇𝑇
𝑤𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑓𝑓𝑣𝑣 =
2𝐴𝐴0 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤

The demand over capacity ratio is evaluated as


𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 =
∅𝑣𝑣 𝑉𝑉𝑛𝑛

10.4 Service Design Request


The service design check calculates at every section cut stresses ff at top steel
flange of composite section, bottom steel flange of composite section and com-
pares them against limits specified in Section 6.10.4.2.2 of the code.

For the top and bottom steel flange of composite sections:


𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 = (6.10.4.2.2-2)
0.95𝑅𝑅ℎ 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦

The flange stresses are derived in the same way as fbu stress demands (see Sec-
tion 9.2 of this manual). The user has an option to specify whether concrete
slab resists tension or not by setting the design request parameter “Does con-
crete slab resist tension?”. It is the responsibility of the user to verify if the slab
qualifies per Section 6.10.4.2.1 of the code to resist tension.

Service Design Request 10 - 19


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

For compact composite sections in positive flexure utilized in shored construc-


tion, the longitudinal compressive stress in the concrete deck, determined as
specified in Article 6.10.1.1.1d, is checked against 0.6f′c.

DoverC = fdeck/0.6f’c

Except for composite sections in positive flexure in which the web satisfies the
requirement of Article 6.10.2.1.1, all section cuts are shall checked against the
following requirement:

𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐
DoverC = (6.10.4.2.2-4)
𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐

where:

fc - compression-flange stress at the section under consideration due to demand


loads calculated without consideration of flange lateral bending

Fcrw - nominal bend-buckling resistance for webs without longitudinal stiffeners


determined as specified in Article 6.10.1.9
0.9𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸
𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = 𝐷𝐷 2
(6.10.1.9.1-1)
�𝑡𝑡 �
𝑤𝑤

but not to exceed the smaller of RhFyc and Fyw/0.7. In which

k=bend buckling coefficient


9
𝑘𝑘 = 𝐷𝐷 2
(6.10.1.9.1-2)
� 𝐷𝐷𝑐𝑐 �

where Dc= depth of the web in compression in the elastic range determined as
specified in Article D6.3.1 of the code.

When both edges of the web are in compression, k is taken as 7.2.

The highest demand over capacity ratio together with controlling equation is
reported for each section cut.

10.5 Web Fatigue Design Request


Web Fatigue Design Request is used to calculate the demand over capacity ra-
tio as defined in Section 6.10.5.3 of the code – Special Fatigue Requirement for

10 - 20 Web Fatigue Design Request


Chapter 10 - Design Steel U-Tub Bridge with Composite Slab

Webs. The requirement is applicable to interior panels of webs with transverse


stiffeners. When processing the design request from the Design module, the
program assumes that there are no vertical stiffeners present and classifies all
web panels as unstiffened. Therefore when the design request is completed
from the Design module the Design Result Status table shows message text –
“No stiffeners defined – use optimization form to define stiffeners”.

In the Optimization form (Design/Rating > Superstructure Design > Optimize


command), the user can specify stiffeners locations and the program recalcu-
lates the Web Fatigue Request. In that case the program classifies the web pan-
els as interior or exterior and stiffened or unstiffened based on criteria specified
in Section 6.10.9.1 of the code. It should be noted that stiffeners are not mod-
eled in the Bridge Object and therefore adding/modifying stiffeners does not
affect the magnitude of the demands.

In the following equations D is taken as depth of the web plate measured along
the slope and each web demand over capacity ratio is calculated based on shear
due to factored loads taken as
𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢
𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 =
cos 𝛼𝛼𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤

Where Vu is vertical shear due to the factored loads on one inclined web and
αweb is the angle of inclination of the web plate to the vertical. The Vui value is
reported in the result tables.

For all single box sections, horizontally curved section, and multiple box sec-
tions in bridges not satisfying the requirements of Article 6.11.2.3, or with bot-
tom flange that is not fully effective according to the provisions of Article
6.11.1.1 Vui is taken as the sum of the flexural and St. Venant torsional shears.
The St. Venant torsional shear is calculated as:

𝑉𝑉𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 = 𝑓𝑓𝑣𝑣 𝐴𝐴𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤


𝑇𝑇
𝑤𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑓𝑓𝑣𝑣 =
2𝐴𝐴0 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤

If live load distribution to girders method “Use Factor Specified by Design


Code” is selected in the design request the program adjusts for the multiple
presence factor to account for the fact that fatigue load occupies only one lane

Web Fatigue Design Request 10 - 21


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

(code Section 3.6.1.4.3b) and multiple presence factors shall not be applied
when checking for fatigue limit state (code Section 3.6.1.1.2).

Vcr = shear-buckling resistance determined from eq. 6.10.9.3.3-1 (see Section


9.3.2.3 of this manual)

DoverC=Vui/Vcr (6.10.5.3-1)

10.6 Constructability Design Request


10.6.1 Staged (Steel-U Comp Construct Stgd)
This request enables the user to verify the superstructure during construction by
utilizing the Nonlinear Staged Construction load case. The use of nonlinear
staged analysis allows the user to define multiple snapshots of the structure
during construction where parts of the bridge deck may be at various comple-
tion stages. The user has a control of which stages the program will include in
the calculations of controlling demand over capacity ratios.

For each section cut specified in the design request the constructability design
check loops through the Nonlinear Staged Construction load case output steps
that correspond to Output Labels specified in the Demand Set. At each step the
program determines the status of the concrete slab at the girder section cut. The
slab status can be non-composite or composite.

The Staged Constructability design check accepts the following Bridge Object
Structural Model Options:
- Area Object Model
- Solid Object Model
The Staged Constructability design check cannot be run on Spine models.

10.6.2 Non-staged (Steel-U Comp Construct NonStgd)


This request enables the user to verify demand over capacity ratios during con-
struction without the need to define and analyze Nonlinear Staged Construction
load case. For each section cut specified in the design request the constructabil-
ity design check loops through all combos specified in the Demand Set list. At
each combo the program assumes the status of the concrete slab as specified by
the user in the Slab Status column. The slab status can be non-composite or
composite and applies to all the section cuts.

10 - 22 Constructability Design Request


Chapter 10 - Design Steel U-Tub Bridge with Composite Slab

The Non-Staged Constructability design check accepts all Bridge Object Struc-
tural Model Options available in Update Bridge Structural Model form.
(Bridge > Update > Structural Model Options option)

10.6.3 Slab Status vs Unbraced Length


Based on the slab status the program calculates corresponding positive flexural
capacity, negative flexural capacity, and shear capacity. Next the program
compares the capacities against demands specified in the Demand Set by calcu-
lating the demand over capacity ratio. The controlling Demand Set and Output
Label on girder basis are reported for every section cut.

When slab status is composite the program assumes that both top and bottom
flanges are continuously braced. When slab status in not present or non-
composite the program treats both top flanges as discretely braced. It should be
noted that the program does not verify presence of diaphragms at a particular
output step. It assumes that anytime a steel beam is activated at a given section
cut that the unbraced length Lb for the top flanges is equal to distance between
the nearest downstation and upstation qualifying cross diaphragms or span ends
as defined in the Bridge Object. In other words the unbraced length Lb is based
on the cross diaphragms that qualify as providing restraint to the bottom flange.
Some of the diaphragm types available in CSiBridge may not necessarily pro-
vide restraint to the top flanges. It is the user responsibility to provide top
flanges temporary bracing at the diaphragm locations prior to the slab acting
compositely.

10.6.4 Flexure
10.6.4.1 Positive Flexure Non Composite
The local buckling resistance of the top compression flange Fnc(FLB) as specified
in Article 6.10.8.2.2 is taken as:

If λf ≤ λ pf, then Fnc = RbRhFyc. (6.10.8.2.2-1)

Otherwise

  Fyr  λ f − λ pf  
Fnc = 1 −  1 −    Rb Rh Fyc (6.10.8.2.2-2)
  Rh Fyc  λrf − λ pf  

in which

Constructability Design Request 10 - 23


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

b fc
λf = (6.10.8.2.2-3)
2t fc

E
λ pf = 0.38 (6.10.8.2.2-4)
Fyc

E
λrf = 0.56 (6.10.8.2.2-5)
Fyr

Fyr = compression-flange stress at the onset of nominal yielding


within the cross-section, including residual stress effects, but
not including compression-flange lateral bending, taken as the
smaller of 0.7Fyc and Fyw, but not less than 0.5 Fyc

The lateral torsional buckling resistance of the top compression flange Fnc(LTB)
as specified in Article (6.10.8.2.3) is taken as follows:

If Lb ≤ Lp, then Fnc = RbRhFyc. (6.10.8.2.3-1)

If Lp < Lb ≤ Lr, then

  Fyr  Lb − L p 
Fnc= Cb 1 −  1 −    Rb Rh Fyc ≤ Rb Rh Fyc . (6.10.8.2.3-2)
  Rh Fyc  Lr − L p  

If Lb > Lr, then Fnc = Fcr ≤ RbRhFyc. (6.10.8.2.3-3)

in which

E E
= =
Lb unbraced =
length, L p 1.0 rt , Lr π rt
Fyc Fyr

Cb = 1 (moment gradient modifier)

Cb Rbπ 2 E
Fcr = 2
(6.10.8.2.3-8)
 Lb 
 r 
 t 

10 - 24 Constructability Design Request


Chapter 10 - Design Steel U-Tub Bridge with Composite Slab

b fc
rt = (6.10.8.2.3-9)
 1 Dc t w 
12  1 + 
 3 b fc t fc 

The nominal flexural resistance of the top compression flange is taken as the
smaller of the local buckling resistance and the lateral torsional buckling re-
sistance:

Fnc = min  Fnc( FLB) , Fnc( LTB) 

Nominal flexural resistance of the bottom tension flange is taken as:

Fnt = RhFytΔ (6.10.7.2.1-2)

Where

2
𝑓𝑓𝑣𝑣
∆= �1 − 3 � �
𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦

𝑇𝑇
Where 𝑓𝑓𝑣𝑣 = is St. Venant torsional shear stress in the flange due to the
2𝐴𝐴0 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
factored loads and A0 is enclosed area within the box section

The demand over capacity ratio is evaluated as


1
𝑓𝑓𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 + 𝑓𝑓𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 𝑓𝑓𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 + 3 𝑓𝑓𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 𝑓𝑓𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑓𝑓𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 𝑓𝑓𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝐷𝐷/𝐶𝐶 = max � , , , , �
𝜙𝜙𝑓𝑓 𝑅𝑅ℎ 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝜙𝜙𝑓𝑓 𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝜙𝜙𝑓𝑓 𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 0.6 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝜙𝜙𝑓𝑓 𝑅𝑅ℎ 𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛

Where Fcrwtop is nominal bend–bucking resistance for webs specified in


AASHTO LRFD Article 6.10.1.9.1 for webs without longitudinal stiffeners.
0.9𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸
𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = 𝐷𝐷 2
(6.10.1.9.1-1)
�𝑡𝑡 �
𝑤𝑤

but not to exceed the smaller of RhFyc and Fyw /0.7


9
where 𝑘𝑘 = 𝐷𝐷 2
. When both edges of the web are in compression then k=7.2
� 𝐷𝐷𝑐𝑐 �

Constructability Design Request 10 - 25


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

10.6.4.2 Positive Flexure Composite


Nominal flexural resistance of the top compression flanges is taken as:

Fnctop= RhFycΔ (6.11.3.2.-3)

Where

2
𝑓𝑓𝑣𝑣
∆= �1 − 3 � �
𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦

𝑇𝑇
Where 𝑓𝑓𝑣𝑣 = is St. Venant torsional shear stress in the flange due to the
2𝐴𝐴0 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
factored loads and A0 is enclosed area within the box section

Nominal flexural resistance of the bottom tension flange is taken as:

Fntbot = RhFytΔ (6.11.3.2.-3)

Where

2
𝑓𝑓𝑣𝑣
∆= �1 − 3 � �
𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦

𝑇𝑇
Where 𝑓𝑓𝑣𝑣 = is St. Venant torsional shear stress in the flange due to the
2𝐴𝐴0 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
factored loads and A0 is enclosed area within the box section

The demand over capacity ratio is evaluated as:

𝑓𝑓𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑓𝑓𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝐷𝐷/𝐶𝐶 = max � , �
𝜙𝜙𝑓𝑓 𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝜙𝜙𝑓𝑓 𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛

10.6.4.3 Negative Flexure Non Composite


The demand over capacity ratio is evaluated as:

𝑓𝑓𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑓𝑓𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 + 𝑓𝑓𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 𝑓𝑓𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙


𝐷𝐷/𝐶𝐶 = max � , , �
𝜙𝜙𝑓𝑓 𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 𝜙𝜙𝑓𝑓 𝑅𝑅ℎ 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 0.6 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦

10 - 26 Constructability Design Request


Chapter 10 - Design Steel U-Tub Bridge with Composite Slab

Where Fnctbot is nominal flexural resistance of the continuously braced unstiff-


ened bottom flange determined as specified in AASHTO LRFD Article
6.11.8.2.2-1 (also see Section 9.3.1.3 of this manual).

10.6.4.4 Negative Flexure Composite


The demand over capacity ratio is evaluated as:

𝑓𝑓𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑓𝑓𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑓𝑓𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑


𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 = 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 � , , �
∅𝑓𝑓 𝐹𝐹𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛 ∅𝑓𝑓 𝑅𝑅ℎ 𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝛥𝛥 𝜙𝜙𝑡𝑡 𝑓𝑓𝑟𝑟

Where Fnctbot is nominal flexural resistance of the continuously braced unstiff-


ened bottom flange determined as specified in AASHTO LRFD Article
6.11.8.2.2-1 (also see Section 9.3.1.3 of this manual), and

2
𝑓𝑓𝑣𝑣
∆= �1 − 3 � �
𝐹𝐹𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦

𝑇𝑇
Where 𝑓𝑓𝑣𝑣 = is St. Venant torsional shear stress in the flange due to the
2𝐴𝐴0 𝑡𝑡𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
factored loads and A0 is enclosed area within the box section and fdeck is de-
mand tensile stress in the deck and fr is modulus of rupture of concrete as de-
termined in AASHTO LRFD Article 5.4.2.6

10.6.5 Shear
When processing the design request from the Design module, the program as-
sumes that there are no vertical stiffeners present and classifies all web panels
as unstiffened. If the shear capacity calculated based on this classification is not
sufficient to resist the demand specified in the design request and the control-
ling demand over capacity ratio is occurring at step when the slab status is
composite, the program recommends minimum stiffener spacing to achieve a
demand over apacity ratio equal to 1. The recommended stiffener spacing is re-
ported in the result table under the column heading d0req.

In the Optimization form (Design/Rating > Superstructure Design > Opti-


mize command), the user can specify stiffeners locations and the program re-
calculates the shear resistance. In that case the program classifies the web pan-
els as interior or exterior and stiffened or unstiffened based on criteria specified
in Section 6.10.9.1 of the code. It should be noted that stiffeners are not mod-

Constructability Design Request 10 - 27


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

eled in the Bridge Object and therefore adding/modifying stiffeners does not
affect the magnitude of the demands. Adding stiffeners also does not increase
capacity of sections cuts where concrete slab status is other then composite.

In the following equations D is taken as depth of the web plate measured along
the slope and each web demand over capacity ratio is calculated based on shear
due to factored loads taken as
𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢
𝑉𝑉𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 =
cos 𝛼𝛼𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤

Where Vu is vertical shear due to the factored loads on one inclined web and
αweb is the angle of inclination of the web plate to the vertical. The Vui value is
reported in the result tables.

10.6.5.1 Torsion Effects


For all single box sections, horizontally curved section, and multiple box sec-
tions in bridges not satisfying the requirements of Article 6.11.2.3, or with bot-
tom flange that is not fully effective according to the provisions of Article
6.11.1.1 Vui is taken as the sum of the flexural and St. Venant torsional shears.
The St. Venant torsional shear is calculated as:

𝑉𝑉𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 = 𝑓𝑓𝑣𝑣 𝐴𝐴𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤


𝑇𝑇
𝑤𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑓𝑓𝑣𝑣 =
2𝐴𝐴0 𝑡𝑡𝑤𝑤

10.6.5.2 Non Composite Sections


The nominal shear resistance of a web end panel is taken as:

𝑉𝑉𝑛𝑛 = 𝑉𝑉𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑝𝑝 (6.10.9.3.3-1)

in which

Vp = 0.58 Fyw Dt w . (6.10.9.3.3-2)

The demand over capacity ratio is evaluated as

Vu
DoverC =
φvVn

10 - 28 Constructability Design Request


Chapter 10 - Design Steel U-Tub Bridge with Composite Slab

10.6.5.3 Composite Sections

10.6.5.3.1 Nominal Resistance of Unstiffened Webs


The nominal shear resistance of unstiffened webs is taken as:

Vn = CVp (6.10.9.2-1)

in which

Vp = 0.58 Fyw Dt w (6.10.9.2-2)

C = the ratio of the shear-buckling resistance to the shear yield strength


that is determined as follows:

D Ek
If ≤ 1.12 , then C = 1.0. (6.10.9.3.2-4)
tw Fyw

Ek D Ek 1.12 Ek
If 1.12 < ≤ 1.40 , then C = . (6.10.9.3.2-5)
Fyw t w Fyw D Fyw
tw

D Ek 1.57  Ek 
If > 1.40 , then C = 2  , (6.10.9.3.2-6)
tw Fyw  D   Fyw 
t 
 w

5
in which k= 5 + 2
. (6.10.9.3.2-7)
 dc 
 
D

10.6.5.3.2 Nominal Resistance of Stiffened Interior


Web Panels
The nominal shear resistance of an interior web panel and with the section at
the section cut proportioned such that:
2 Dt w
≤ 2.5 (6.10.9.3.2-1)
( b fc t fc + b ft t ft )
is taken as

Constructability Design Request 10 - 29


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

 0.87 (1 − C ) 
=
Vn Vp C +
2 
(6.10.9.3.2-2)
  do  
 1+   
 D 

in which Vp = 0.58 Fyw Dt w (6.10.9.3.2-3)

where

do = transverse stiffener spacing.

Otherwise, the nominal shear resistance is taken as follows:

 0.87 (1 − C ) 
=
Vn Vp C +  (6.10.9.3.2-8)
  
 
2
  do  d
  1 +   + o 
  D D 

10.6.5.3.3 Nominal Resistance of End Panels


The nominal shear resistance of a web end panel is taken as:

𝑉𝑉𝑛𝑛 = 𝑉𝑉𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = 𝐶𝐶𝑉𝑉𝑝𝑝 (6.10.9.3.3-1)

in which

Vp = 0.58 Fyw Dt w . (6.10.9.3.3-2)

The demand over capacity ratio is evaluated as

Vu
DoverC =
φvVn

10.7 Section Optimization

After at least one Steel Design Request has been successfully processed,
CSiBridge enables the user to open a Steel Section Optimization module. The
Optimization module allows interactive modification of certain steel plate siz-
es, materials, and definition of vertical stiffeners along each girder and span.
The U tub section plate parameters that are available for modification are:

10 - 30 Section Optimization
Chapter 10 - Design Steel U-Tub Bridge with Composite Slab

Top flange – thickness, width and material

Webs –thickness, material

Bottom flange – thickness, material

The program recalculates resistance “on the fly” based on the modified section
without the need to unlock the model and rerun the analysis. It should be noted
that in the optimization process the demands are not recalculated and are based
on the current CSiBridge analysis results.

The Optimization form allows simultaneous display of three versions of section


sizes and associated resistance results. The section plate size versions are “As
Analyzed,” “As Designed,” and “Current.” The section plots use distinct colors
for each version – black for As Analyzed, blue for As Designed, and red for
Current. When the Optimization form is initially opened, all three versions are
identical and equal to “As Analyzed.”

Two graphs are available to display various forces, moments, stresses, and rati-
os for the As Analyzed or As Designed versions. The values plotted can be
controlled by clicking the “Select Series to Plot” button. The As Analyzed se-
ries are plotted as solid lines and the As Designed series as dashed lines.

To modify steel plate sizes or vertical stiffeners, a new form can be displayed
by clicking on the Modify Section button. After the section modification is
completed, the Current version is shown in red in the elevation and cross sec-
tion views. After the resistance has been recalculated successfully by clicking
the Recalculate Resistance button, the Current version is designated to As De-
signed and displayed in blue.

After the section optimization has been completed, the As Designed plate sizes
and materials can be applied to the analysis bridge object by clicking the OK
button. The button opens a new form that can be used to Unlock the existing
model (in that case all analysis results will be deleted) or save the file under a
new name (New File button). Clicking the Exit button does not apply the new
plate sizes to the bridge object and keeps the model locked. The As Designed
version of the plate sizes will be available the next time the form is opened, and
the Current version is discarded.

Section Optimization
10 - 31
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

The previously defined stiffeners can be recalled in the Steel Beam Section
Variation form by clicking the Copy/Reset/Recall button in the top menu of
the form. The form can be displayed by clicking on the Modify Section but-
ton.

10 - 32 Section Optimization
Chapter 11
Run a Bridge Design Request

This chapter identifies the steps involved in running a Bridge Design Request.
(Chapter 4 explains how to define the Request.) Running the Request applies
the following to the specified Bridge Object:

 Program defaults in accordance with the selected codethe Preferences

 Type of design to be performedthe check type (Section 4.2.1)

 Portion of the bridge to be designedthe station ranges (Section 4.1.3)

 Overwrites of the Preferencesthe Design Request parameters (Section


4.1.4)

 Load combinationsthe demand sets (Chapter 2)

 Live Load Distribution factors, where applicable (Chapter 3)

For this example, the AASHTO LRFD 2014 code is applied to the model of a
concrete box-girder bridge shown in Figure 11-1.

It is assumed that the user is familiar with the steps that are necessary to create
a CSiBridge model of a concrete box girder bridge. If additional assistance is
needed to create the model, a 30-minute Watch and Learn video entitled,
”Bridge – Bridge Information Modeler” is available at the CSI website

11 - 1
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

www.csiamerica.com. The tutorial video guides the user through the creation
of the bridge model referenced in this chapter.

Figure 11-1 3D view of example concrete box girder bridge model

11.1 Description of Example Model


The example bridge is a two-span prestressed concrete box girder bridge with
the following features:

Abutments: The abutments are skewed by 15 degrees and connected to the


bottom of the box girder only.

Prestress: The concrete box girder bridge is prestressed with four 10-in2
tendons (one in each girder) and a jacking force of 2160 kips per tendon.

Bents: The one interior bent has three 5-foot-square columns.

Deck: The concrete box girder has a nominal depth of 5 feet. The deck has
a parabolic variation in depth from 5 feet at the abutments to a maximum
of 10 feet at the interior bent support.

Spans: The two spans are each approximately 100 feet long.

Figure 11-2 Elevation view of example bridge

11 - 2 Description of Example Model


Chapter 11 - Run a Bridge Design Request

Figure 11-3 Plan view of the example bridge

11.2 Design Preferences


Use the Design/Rating > Superstructure Design > Preferences command to
select the AASHTO LRFD 2014 design code. The Bridge Design Preferences
form shown in Figure 11-4 displays.

Figure 11-4 Bridge Design Preferences form

11.3 Load Combinations


For this example, the default design load combinations were activated using the
Design/Rating > Load Combinations > Add Defaults command. After the
Bridge Design option has been selected, the Code-Generated Load Combina-
tions for Bridge Design form shown in Figure 11-5 displays. The form is used

Design Preferences 11 - 3
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

to specify the desired limit states. Only the Strength II limit state was selected
for this example. Normally, several limit states would be selected.

Figure 11-5 Code-Generated Load Combinations for Bridge Design form

The defined load combinations for this example are shown in Figure 11-6.

Figure 11-6 Define Load Combinations form

11 - 4 Load Combinations
Chapter 11 - Run a Bridge Design Request

The Str-II1, Str-II2 and StrIIGroup1 designations for the load combinations are
specified by the program and indicate that the limit state for the combinations
is Strength Level II.

11.4 Bridge Design Request


After the Design/Rating > Superstructure Design > Design Request com-
mand has been used, the Bridge Design Request form shown in Figure 11-7
displays.

Figure 11- 7 Define Load Combinations form

The name given to this example Design Request is FLEX_1, the Check Type
is for Concrete Box Flexure and the Demand Set, DSet1, specifies the combi-
nation as StrII (Strength Level II).

Bridge Design Request 11 - 5


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

The only Design Request Parameter option for a Concrete Box Flexural check
type is for PhiC. A value of 0.9 for PhiC is used.

11.5 Start Design/Check of the Bridge


After an analysis has been run, the bridge model is ready for a design/check.
Use the Design/Rating > Superstructure Design > Run Super command to
start the design process. Select the design to be run using the Perform Bridge
Design form shown in Figure 11-8:

Figure 11-8 Perform Bridge Design - Superstructure

The user may select the desired Design Request(s) and click on the Design
Now button. A plot of the bridge model, similar to that shown in Figure 11-9,
will display.

If several Design Requests


have been run, the individ-
ual Design Requests can be
selected from the Design
Check options drop-down
list. This plot is described
further in Chapter 11.

Figure 11-9 Plot of flexure


check results

11 - 6 Start Design/Check of the Bridge


Chapter 12
Display Bridge Design Results

Bridge design results can be displayed on screen and as printed output. The
on-screen display can depict the bridge response graphically as a plot or in
data tables. The Advanced Report Writer can be used to create the printed
output, which can include the graphical display as well as the database ta-
bles.

This chapter displays the results for the example used in Chapter 10. The
model is a concrete box girder bridge and the code applied is AASHTO LRFD
2014. Creation of the model is shown in a 30-minute Watch and Learn
video on the CSI website, www.csiamerica.com.

12.1 Display Results as a Plot


To view the forces, stresses, and design results graphically, click the Home >
Display > Show Bridge Superstructure Design Results command, which will
display the Bridge Object Response Display form shown in Figure 12-1.

The plot shows the design results for the FLEX_1 Design Request created us-
ing the process described in the preceding chapters. The demand moments
are enveloped and shown in the blue region, and the negative capacity mo-
ments are shown with a brown line. If the demand moments do not exceed
the capacity moments, the superstructure may be deemed adequate in re-

Display Results as a Plot 12 - 1


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

sponse to the flexure Design Request. Move the mouse pointer onto the de-
mand or capacity plot to view the values for each nodal point. Move the
pointer to the capacity moment at station 1200 and 536981.722 kip-in is
shown. A verification calculation that shows agreement with this CSiBridge
result is provided in Section 12.4.

Figure 12-1 Plot of flexure check results for the example bridge design model

12.1.1 Additional Display Examples


Use the Home > Display > Show Bridge Forces/Stresses command to select, on
the example form shown in Figure 12-2, the location along the top or bottom
portions of a beam or slab for which stresses are to be displayed. Figures 12-3
through 12-9 illustrate the left, middle, and right portions as they apply to
Multicell Concrete Box Sections. Location 1, as an example, refers to the top
left selection option while location 5 would refer to the bottom center selec-
tion option. Locations 1, 2, and 3 refer to the top left, top center, and top
right selection option while locations 4, 5, and 6 refer to the bottom left, bot-
tom center, and bottom right selection options.

12 - 2 Display Results as a Plot


Chapter 12 - Display Bridge Design Results

Figure 12-2 Select the location on the beam or slab for which results are to be displayed

1 2 3 1 2 3

Top slab cut line

4
Bottom slab cut line

5 6 4 5 6
Centerline of the Centerline of the

Display Results as a Plot 12- 3


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Figure 12-3 Bridge Concrete Box Deck Section - External Girders Vertical

1 2 3 1 2 3

Top slab cut

Bottom slab cut 4

5 6 4 5 6
Centerline of the Centerline of the

Figure 12-4 Bridge Concrete Box Deck Section - External Girders Sloped

1 2 3 1 2 3

Top slab cut

4
Bottom slab cut

5 6 4 5 6
Centerline of the Centerline of the

12 - 4 Display Results as a Plot


Chapter 12 - Display Bridge Design Results

Figure 12-5 Bridge Concrete Box Deck Section - External Girders Clipped

1 2 3 1 2 3

Top slab cut

4
Bottom slab cut

5 6 4 5 6

Centerline of the Centerline of the

Figure 12-6 Bridge Concrete Box Deck Section - External Girders and Radius

1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3

Top slab cut line

Bottom slab cut


4, 5
6 4
5 6 4 5 6
Centerline of the
Centerline of the web
Centerline of the

Display Results as a Plot 12- 5


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Figure 12-7 Bridge Concrete Box Deck Section - External Girders Sloped Max

1 2 3 1 2 3

Top slab cut line

4
Bottom slab cut line

5 6 4 5 6
Centerline of the web Centerline of the web

Figure 12-8 Bridge Concrete Box Deck Section - Advanced

1 2 3

Top slab cut line

4
Bottom slab cut

5 6

Centerline of the

12 - 6 Display Results as a Plot


Chapter 12 - Display Bridge Design Results

Figure 12-9 Bridge Concrete Box Deck Section - AASHTO - PCI - ASBI Standard

12.2 Display Data Tables


To view design results on screen in tables, click the Home > Display > Show
Tables command, which will display the Choose Tables for Display form
shown in Figure 12-10. Use the options on that form to select which data re-
sults are to be viewed. Multiple selection may be made.

Figure 12-10 Choose Tables for Display form

When all selections have been made, click the OK button and a database ta-
ble similar to that shown in Figure 12-11 will display. Note the drop-down
list in the upper right-hand corner of the table. That drop-down list will in-
clude the various data tables that match the selections made on the Choose
Tables for Display form. Select from that list to change to a different database
table.

Display Data Tables 12- 7


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Figure 12-11 Design database table for AASHTO LRFD 2014 flexure check

The scroll bar along the bottom of the form can be used to scroll to the right
to view additional data columns.

12.3 Advanced Report Writer


The File > Report > Create Report command is a single button click output
option but it may not be suitable for bridge structures because of the size of
the document that is generated. Instead, the Advanced Report Writer feature
within CSiBridge is a simple and easy way to produce a custom output re-
port.

To create a custom report that includes input and output, first export the files
using one of the File > Export commands: Access; Excel; or Text. When this
command is executed, a form similar to that shown in Figure 12-12 displays.

12 - 8 Advanced Report Writer


Chapter 12 - Display Bridge Design Results

Figure 12-12 Choose Tables for Export to Access form

This important step allows control over the size of the report to be generat-
ed. Export only those tables to be included in the final report. However, it is
possible to export larger quantities of data and then use the Advanced Report
Writer to select only specific data sets for individual reports, thus creating
multiple smaller reports. For this example, only the Bridge Data (input) and
Concrete Box Flexure design (output) are exported.

After the data tables have been exported and saved to an appropriate loca-
tion, click the File > Report > Advanced Report Writer command to display a
form similar to that show in Figure 12-13. Click the appropriate button (e.g.,
Find existing DB File, Convert Excel File, Convert Text File) and locate the
exported data tables. The tables within that Database, Excel, or Text file will
be listed in the List of Tables in Current Database File display box.

Advanced Report Writer 12- 9


CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

Figure 12-13 Create Custom Report form

Select the tables to be included in the report from that display box. The se-
lected items will then display in the Items Included in Report display box.
Use the various options on the form to control the order in which the select-
ed tables appear in the report as well as the headers (i.e., Section names),
page breaks, pictures, and blanks required for final output in .rft, .txt, or
.html format.

After the tables have been selected and the headers, pictures, and other for-
matting items have been addressed, click the Create Report button to gener-
ate the report. The program will request a filename and the path to be used
to store the report. Figure 12-14 shows an example of the printed output
generated by the Report Writer.

12 - 10 Advanced Report Writer


Chapter 12 - Display Bridge Design Results

Figure 12-14 An example of the printed output

12.4 Verification
As a verification check of the design results, the output at station 1200 is ex-
amined. The following output for negative bending has been pulled from the
ConBoxFlexure data table, a portion of which is shown in Figure 12-10:

Demand moment, “DemandMax” (kip-in) = −245973.481


Resisting moment, “ResistingNeg” (kip-in) = 536981.722
Total area of prestressing steel, “AreaPTTop” (in2) = 20.0
Top k factor, “kFactorTop” = 0.2644444
Neutral axis depth, c, “CDistForNeg” (in) = 5.1286
Effective stress in prestressing, fps, “EqFpsForNeg” (kip/in2) = 266.7879

A hand calculation that verifies the results follows:

 For top k factor, from (eq. 5.7.3.1.1-2),

 f   245.1 
k = 2  1.04 − PY  = 2  1.04 − = 0.26444 (Results match)
 fPU   270 

Verification 12- 11
CSiBridge Bridge Superstructure Design

 For neutral axis depth, from (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-4),

c=
( )
APT fPU − 0.85 f ′c bslab − bwebeq tslabeq
, for a T-section
fPU
0.85 f ′c β1bwebeq + kAPT
YPT
APT fPU
c= , when not a T-section
fPU
0.85 f ′c β1bwebeq + kAPT
YPT
20.0(270)
c = 5.1286 (Results match)
 270 
0.85(4)(0.85)(360) + 0.26444(20)  
 114 

 For effective stress in prestressing, from (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.1.1-1),

 c   5.1286 
fPS = fPU  1 − k  =270  1 − 0.26444 =266.788 (Results match)
 YPT   144 

 For resisting moment, from (AASHTO LRFD eq. 5.7.3.2.2-1),

 cβ   cβ t 
M N APT f PS  YPT − 1  + 0.85 f ′c ( bSLAB − bwebeq ) tslabeq  1 − slabeq 
=
 2   2 2 

 cβ 
=M N APT f PS  YPT − 1  , when the box section is not a T-section
 2 
 5.1286(0.85) 
=
M N 20.0(266.788)  144 − =  596646.5 kip-in
 2 
M R φ=
= = 536981.8 kip-in (Results match)
M N 0.85(596646.5)

The preceding calculations are a check of the flexure design output. Other
design results for concrete box stress, concrete box shear, and concrete box
principal have not been included. The user is encouraged to perform a simi-
lar check of these designs and to review Chapters 5, 6, and 7 for a detailed
descriptions of the design algorithms.

12 - 12 Verification
Bibliography

ACI, 2007. Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete (ACI 318-
08) and Commentary (ACI 318R-08), American Concrete Institute,
P.O. Box 9094, Farmington Hills, Michigan.

AASHTO, 2007. AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications — Customary


U.S. Units, 4th Edition, 2008 Interim Revision, American Associa-
tion of State Highway and Transportation Officials, 444 North Capi-
tol Street, NW, Suite 249, Washington, D.C. 20001.

AASHTO, 2009. AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge


Design. American Association of Highway and Transportation Offi-
cials, 444 North Capital Street, NW Suite 249, Washington, DC
20001.

AASHTO 2012. AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications — U.S.


Units, 6th Edition, American Association of State High way and
Transportation Officials, 2012.

AASHTO 2014. AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications — U.S.


Units, 7th Edition, American Association of State High way and
Transportation Officials, 2014

Bibliography - 1
SAFE Reinforced Concrete Design

Canadian Standards Association (CSA), 2006. Canadian Highway Bridge De-


sign Code. Canadian Standards Association, 5060 Spectrum Way,
Suite 100, Mississauga, Ontario, Canada, L4W 5N6. November.

EN 1994-2:2005, Eurocode 4: Design of composite steel and concrete struc-


tures, Part 2: Composite Bridges, European Committee for Standard-
ization, Management Centre: rue de Stassart, 36 B-1050 Brussels.

Indian Roads Congress (IRC), May 2010: Standard Specifications and Code
of Practice for Road Bridges, Section V, Steel Road Bridges. Kama
Koti Marg, Sector 6, RK Puram, New Delhi- 110 022.

R-2

You might also like